Madhya-lila 6.1
Sourceনৌমি তং গৌরচন্দ্রং যঃ কুতর্ক-কর্কশাশয়ম্ । সার্বভৌমং সর্বভূমা ভক্তিভূমানমাচরৎ ॥ ১ ॥
naumi taṁ gauracandraṁ yaḥ kutarka-karkaśāśayam sārvabhaumaṁ sarva-bhūmā bhakti-bhūmānam ācarat
English translation
Translation
I offer my respectful obeisances unto Lord Gauracandra, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who converted the hardhearted Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, the reservoir of all bad logic, into a great devotee.
Word meanings
naumi — I offer my respectful obeisances ; tam — unto Him ; gauracandram — who is known as Lord Gauracandra ; yaḥ — who ; ku - tarka — by bad arguments ; karkaśa - āśayam — whose heart was hard ; sārvabhaumam — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; sarva - bhūmā — the Lord of everything ; bhakti - bhūmānam — into a great personality of devotion ; ācarat — converted .
Madhya-lila 6.2
Sourceজয় জয় গৌরচন্দ্র জয় নিত্যানন্দ । জয়াদ্বৈতচন্দ্র জয় গৌরভক্তবৃন্দ ॥ ২ ॥
jaya jaya gauracandra jaya nityānanda jayādvaitacandra jaya gaura-bhakta-vṛnda
English translation
Translation
All glories to Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu! All glories to Lord Nityānanda Prabhu! All glories to Advaita Ācārya! And all glories to all the devotees of Lord Caitanya!
Word meanings
jaya jaya gauracandra — all glories to Lord Gaurahari ; jaya nityānanda — all glories to Nityānanda Prabhu ; jaya advaita - candra — all glories to Advaita Ācārya ; jaya gaura - bhakta - vṛnda — all glories to the devotees of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .
Madhya-lila 6.3
Sourceআবেশে চলিলা প্রভু জগন্নাথ-মন্দিরে । জগন্নাথ দেখি’ প্রেমে হইলা অস্থিরে ॥ ৩ ॥
āveśe calilā prabhu jagannātha-mandire jagannātha dekhi’ preme ha-ilā asthire
English translation
Translation
In ecstasy, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu went from Āṭhāranālā to the temple of Jagannātha. After seeing Lord Jagannātha, He became very restless due to love of Godhead.
Word meanings
āveśe — in ecstasy ; calilā — went ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; jagannātha - mandire — to the temple of Jagannātha ; jagannātha dekhi’ — seeing the Jagannātha Deity ; preme — in ecstasy ; ha - ilā — became ; asthire — restless .
Madhya-lila 6.4
Sourceজগন্নাথ আলিঙ্গিতে চলিলা ধাঞা । মন্দিরে পড়িলা প্রেমে আবিষ্ট হঞা ॥ ৪ ॥
jagannātha āliṅgite calilā dhāñā mandire paḍilā preme āviṣṭa hañā
English translation
Translation
Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu went swiftly to embrace Lord Jagannātha, but when He entered the temple, He was so overwhelmed with love of Godhead that He fainted to the floor.
Word meanings
jagannātha — Lord Jagannātha ; āliṅgite — to embrace ; calilā — went ; dhāñā — very swiftly ; mandire — in the temple ; paḍilā — fell down ; preme — in ecstasy ; āviṣṭa — overwhelmed ; hañā — becoming .
Madhya-lila 6.5
Sourceদৈবে সার্বভৌম তাঁহাকে করে দরশন । পড়িছা মারিতে তেঁহো কৈল নিবারণ ॥ ৫ ॥
daive sārvabhauma tāṅhāke kare daraśana paḍichā mārite teṅho kaila nivāraṇa
English translation
Translation
When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu fell down, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya happened to see Him. When the watchman threatened to beat the Lord, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya immediately forbade him.
Word meanings
daive — by chance ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; tāṅhāke — Him ; kare — does ; daraśana — seeing ; paḍichā — the watchman in the temple ; mārite — to beat ; teṅho — he ; kaila — did ; nivāraṇa — forbidding .
Madhya-lila 6.6
Sourceপ্রভুর সৌন্দর্য আর প্রেমের বিকার । দেখি’ সার্বভৌম হৈলা বিস্মিত অপার ॥ ৬ ॥
prabhura saundarya āra premera vikāra dekhi’ sārvabhauma hailā vismita apāra
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was very surprised to see the personal beauty of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu, as well as the transcendental transformations wrought on His body due to love of Godhead.
Word meanings
prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; saundarya — the beauty ; āra — and ; premera vikāra — ecstatic transformations ; dekhi’ — seeing ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; hailā — became ; vismita — surprised ; apāra — very .
Madhya-lila 6.7
Sourceবহুক্ষণে চৈতন্য নহে, ভোগের কাল হৈল । সার্বভৌম মনে তবে উপায় চিন্তিল ॥ ৭ ॥
bahu-kṣaṇe caitanya nahe, bhogera kāla haila sārvabhauma mane tabe upāya cintila
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu remained unconscious for a long time. Meanwhile, the time for offering prasādam to Lord Jagannātha came, and the Bhaṭṭācārya tried to think of a remedy.
Word meanings
bahu - kṣaṇe — for a long time ; caitanya — consciousness ; nahe — there was not ; bhogera — of offering food ; kāla — the time ; haila — it became ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; mane — in the mind ; tabe — at that time ; upāya — remedy ; cintila — thought .
Madhya-lila 6.8
Sourceশিষ্য পড়িছা-দ্বারা প্রভু নিল বহাঞা । ঘরে আনি’ পবিত্র স্থানে রাখিল শোয়াঞা ॥ ৮ ॥
śiṣya paḍichā-dvārā prabhu nila vahāñā ghare āni’ pavitra sthāne rākhila śoyāñā
English translation
Translation
While Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu was unconscious, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, with the help of the watchman and some disciples, carried Him to his home and laid Him down in a very sanctified room.
Word meanings
śiṣya — disciples ; paḍichā — and watchman ; dvārā — by means of ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nila — brought ; vahāñā — carrying ; ghare — at home ; āni’ — bringing ; pavitra — purified ; sthāne — in a place ; rākhila — kept ; śoyāñā — lying down .
Purport
At that time, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya lived on the southern side of the Jagannātha Temple. His home was practically on the beach and was known as Mārkaṇḍeya-sarastaṭa. At present it is used as the monastery of Gaṅgāmātā.
Madhya-lila 6.9
Sourceশ্বাস-প্রশ্বাস নাহি উদর-স্পন্দন । দেখিয়া চিন্তিত হৈল ভট্টাচার্যের মন ॥ ৯ ॥
śvāsa-praśvāsa nāhi udara-spandana dekhiyā cintita haila bhaṭṭācāryera mana
English translation
Translation
Examining the body of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, Sārvabhauma saw that His abdomen was not moving and that He was not breathing. Seeing His condition, the Bhaṭṭācārya became very anxious.
Word meanings
śvāsa - praśvāsa — breathing ; nāhi — there was not ; udara — of the abdomen ; spandana — movement ; dekhiyā — seeing ; cintita — full of anxiety ; haila — became ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; mana — the mind .
Madhya-lila 6.10
Sourceসূক্ষ্ম তুলা আনি’ নাসা-অগ্রেতে ধরিল । ঈষৎ চলয়ে তুলা দেখি’ ধৈর্য হৈল ॥ ১০ ॥
sūkṣma tulā āni’ nāsā-agrete dharila īṣat calaye tulā dekhi’ dhairya haila
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya then took a fine cotton swab and put it before the Lord’s nostrils. When he saw the cotton move very slightly, he became hopeful.
Word meanings
sūkṣma — fine ; tulā — cotton ; āni’ — bringing ; nāsā — of the nostril ; agrete — in front ; dharila — held ; īṣat — slightly ; calaye — moves ; tulā — the cotton ; dekhi’ — seeing ; dhairya — patience ; haila — there was .
Madhya-lila 6.11
Sourceবসি’ ভট্টাচার্য মনে করেন বিচার । এই কৃষ্ণ-মহাপ্রেমের সাত্ত্বিক বিকার ॥ ১১ ॥
vasi’ bhaṭṭācārya mane karena vicāra ei kṛṣṇa-mahāpremera sāttvika vikāra
English translation
Translation
Sitting beside Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, he thought, “This is a transcendental ecstatic transformation brought about by love of Kṛṣṇa.”
Word meanings
vasi’ — sitting down ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; mane — in his mind ; karena — does ; vicāra — consideration ; ei — this ; kṛṣṇa - mahā - premera — of ecstatic love for Kṛṣṇa ; sāttvika — transcendental ; vikāra — transformation .
Madhya-lila 6.12
Source‘সূদ্দীপ্ত সাত্ত্বিক’ এই নাম যে ‘প্রলয়’ । নিত্যসিদ্ধ ভক্তে সে ‘সূদ্দীপ্ত ভাব’ হয় ॥ ১২ ॥
‘sūddīpta sāttvika’ ei nāma ye ‘pralaya’ nitya-siddha bhakte se ‘sūddīpta bhāva’ haya
English translation
Translation
Upon seeing the sign of sūddīpta-sāttvika, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya could immediately understand the transcendental ecstatic transformation in the body of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Such a sign takes place only in the bodies of eternally liberated devotees.
Word meanings
su - uddīpta sāttvika — sūddīpta-sāttvika ; ei — this ; nāma — named ; ye — which ; pralaya — devastation ; nitya - siddha — eternally perfected ; bhakte — in the devotee ; se — that ; su - uddīpta bhāva — ecstasy known as sūddīpta ; haya — becomes manifest .
Purport
The word sūddīpta-sāttvika is explained as follows by Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura: “The Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu mentions eight kinds of transcendental transformations in the bodies of advanced devotees. These are sometimes checked by the devotee, and there are two stages of such checking, technically known as dhūmāyitā and jvalitā. The dhūmāyitā (smoking) stage is exhibited when only one or two transformations are slightly present and it is possible to conceal them. When more than two or three transcendental transformations are manifest and it is still possible to conceal them, although with great difficulty, that stage is called jvalitā (lighted). When four or five symptoms are exhibited, the dīpta (blazing) stage has been reached. When five, six or all eight symptoms are simultaneously manifest, that position is called uddīpta (inflamed). And when all eight symptoms are multiplied a thousand times and are all visible at once, the devotee is in the sūddīpta (intensely inflamed) stage. Nitya-siddha-bhakta indicates the eternally liberated associates of the Lord. Such devotees enjoy the company of the Lord in four relationships — as servant, friend, parent or conjugal lover.”
Madhya-lila 6.13
Source‘অধিরূঢ় ভাব’ যাঁর, তাঁর এ বিকার । মনুষ্যের দেহে দেখি, — বড় চমৎকার ॥ ১৩ ॥
‘adhirūḍha bhāva’ yāṅra, tāṅra e vikāra manuṣyera dehe dekhi, — baḍa camatkāra
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya considered, “The uncommon ecstatic symptoms of adhirūḍha-bhāva are appearing in the body of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. This is very wonderful! How are they possible in the body of a human being?”
Word meanings
adhirūḍha bhāva — an ecstasy technically known as adhirūḍha ; yāṅra — of whom ; tāṅra — of Him ; e — this ; vikāra — transformation ; manuṣyera — of a human being ; dehe — in the body ; dekhi — I see ; baḍa camatkāra — very wonderful .
Purport
Adhirūḍha-bhāva, or adhirūḍha-mahābhāva, is explained in the Ujjvala-nīlamaṇi of Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī. Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura quotes Rūpa Gosvāmī as follows: “The loving propensity of the āśraya (devotee) toward the viṣaya (Lord) becomes so ecstatic that even after enjoying the company of the beloved, the devotee feels that his enjoyment is insufficient. At such a time, the lover sees the beloved in different ways. Such a development of ecstasy is called anurāga. When anurāga reaches its highest limit and becomes perceivable in the body, it is called bhāva. When the bodily symptoms are not very distinct, however, the emotional state is still called anurāga, not bhāva. When bhāva ecstasy is intensified, it is called mahā-bhāva. The symptoms of mahā-bhāva are visible only in the bodies of eternal associates like the gopīs. ”
Madhya-lila 6.14
Sourceএত চিন্তি’ ভট্টাচার্য আছেন বসিয়া । নিত্যানন্দাদি সিংহদ্বারে মিলিল আসিয়া ॥ ১৪ ॥
eta cinti’ bhaṭṭācārya āchena vasiyā nityānandādi siṁha-dvāre milila āsiyā
English translation
Translation
While the Bhaṭṭācārya was thinking in this way at his home, all the devotees of Caitanya Mahāprabhu, headed by Nityānanda Prabhu, approached the Siṁha-dvāra [the entrance door of the temple].
Word meanings
eta cinti’ — thinking like this ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; āchena — was ; vasiyā — sitting ; nityānanda - ādi — all the devotees, headed by Nityānanda Prabhu ; siṁha - dvāre — at the entrance door of the Jagannātha temple ; milila — met ; āsiyā — coming .
Madhya-lila 6.15
Sourceতাঁহা শুনে লোকে কহে অন্যোন্যে বাত্ । এক সন্ন্যাসী আসি’ দেখি’ জগন্নাথ ॥ ১৫ ॥
tāṅhā śune loke kahe anyonye bāt eka sannyāsī āsi’ dekhi’ jagannātha
English translation
Translation
There the devotees heard the people talking about a mendicant who had come to Jagannātha Purī and seen the Deity of Jagannātha.
Word meanings
tāṅhā — at that place ; śune — they hear ; loke — the people in general ; kahe — talk ; anyonye — among themselves ; bāt — topics ; eka — one ; sannyāsī — mendicant ; āsi’ — coming there ; dekhi’ — seeing ; jagannātha — the Deity of Lord Jagannātha .
Madhya-lila 6.16
Sourceমূর্চ্ছিত হৈল, চেতন না হয় শরীরে । সার্বভৌম লঞা গেলা আপনার ঘরে ॥ ১৬ ॥
mūrcchita haila, cetana nā haya śarīre sārvabhauma lañā gelā āpanāra ghare
English translation
Translation
The people said that the sannyāsī had fallen unconscious upon seeing the Deity of Lord Jagannātha. Because His consciousness did not return, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya had taken Him to his home.
Word meanings
mūrcchita — unconscious ; haila — became ; cetana — consciousness ; nā — not ; haya — there is ; śarīre — in His body ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; lañā — taking Him ; gelā — went ; āpanāra — his own ; ghare — to the home .
Madhya-lila 6.17
Sourceশুনি’ সবে জানিলা এই মহাপ্রভুর কার্য । হেনকালে আইলা তাহাঁ গোপীনাথাচার্য ॥ ১৭ ॥
śuni’ sabe jānilā ei mahāprabhura kārya hena-kāle āilā tāhāṅ gopīnāthācārya
English translation
Translation
Hearing this, the devotees could understand that they were speaking of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Just then, Śrī Gopīnātha Ācārya arrived.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing this ; sabe — all the devotees ; jānilā — could understand ; ei — this ; mahāprabhura — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kārya — the activities ; hena - kāle — at that time ; āilā — came ; tāhāṅ — there ; gopīnātha - ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya .
Madhya-lila 6.18
Sourceনদীয়া-নিবাসী, বিশারদের জামাতা । মহাপ্রভুর ভক্ত তেঁহো প্রভুতত্ত্বজ্ঞাতা ॥ ১৮ ॥
nadīyā-nivāsī, viśāradera jāmātā mahāprabhura bhakta teṅho prabhu-tattva-jñātā
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya was a resident of Nadia, the son-in-law of Viśārada and a devotee of Caitanya Mahāprabhu. He knew the true identity of His Lordship.
Word meanings
nadīyā - nivāsī — an inhabitant of Nadia ; viśāradera — of Viśārada ; jāmātā — the son-in-law ; mahāprabhura bhakta — a devotee of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; teṅho — he ; prabhu - tattva - jñātā — a knower of the true identity of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .
Purport
Maheśvara Viśārada was a classmate of Nīlāmbara Cakravartī’s. He lived in the Nadia, district in a village called Vidyānagara, and had two sons named Madhusūdana Vācaspati and Vāsudeva Sārvabhauma. His son-in-law was Gopīnātha Ācārya.
Madhya-lila 6.19
Sourceমুকুন্দ-সহিত পূর্বে আছে পরিচয় । মুকুন্দ দেখিয়া তাঁর হইল বিস্ময় ॥ ১৯ ॥
mukunda-sahita pūrve āche paricaya mukunda dekhiyā tāṅra ha-ila vismaya
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya had previously been acquainted with Mukunda Datta, and when the Ācārya saw him at Jagannātha Purī, he was very much astonished.
Word meanings
mukunda - sahita — with Mukunda Datta ; pūrve — previously ; āche — there was ; paricaya — acquaintance ; mukunda — Mukunda Datta ; dekhiyā — seeing ; tāṅra — of him (Gopīnātha Ācārya) ; ha - ila — there was ; vismaya — astonishment .
Madhya-lila 6.20
Sourceমুকুন্দ তাঁহারে দেখি’ কৈল নমস্কার । তেঁহো আলিঙ্গিয়া পুছে প্রভুর সমাচার ॥ ২০ ॥
mukunda tāṅhāre dekhi’ kaila namaskāra teṅho āliṅgiyā puche prabhura samācāra
English translation
Translation
Mukunda Datta offered obeisances unto Gopīnātha Ācārya upon meeting him. Then the Ācārya embraced Mukunda Datta and inquired about news of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
mukunda — Mukunda Datta ; tāṅhāre — him ; dekhi’ — seeing ; kaila — offered ; namaskāra — obeisances ; teṅho — he ; āliṅgiyā — embracing ; puche — inquires ; prabhura — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; samācāra — news .
Madhya-lila 6.21
Sourceমুকুন্দ কহে, — প্রভুর ইহাঁ হৈল আগমনে । আমি-সব আসিয়াছি মহাপ্রভুর সনে ॥ ২১ ॥
mukunda kahe, — prabhura ihāṅ haila āgamane āmi-saba āsiyāchi mahāprabhura sane
English translation
Translation
Mukunda Datta replied, “The Lord has already arrived here. We have come with Him.”
Word meanings
mukunda kahe — Mukunda replies ; prabhura — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ihāṅ — here ; haila — there was ; āgamane — coming ; āmi - saba — all of us ; āsiyāchi — have come ; mahāprabhura — Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sane — with .
Madhya-lila 6.22
Sourceনিত্যানন্দ-গোসাঞিকে আচার্য কৈল নমস্কার । সবে মেলি’ পুছে প্রভুর বার্তা বার বার ॥ ২২ ॥
nityānanda-gosāñike ācārya kaila namaskāra sabe meli’ puche prabhura vārtā bāra bāra
English translation
Translation
As soon as Gopīnātha Ācārya saw Nityānanda Prabhu, he offered his obeisances unto Him. In this way, meeting all the devotees, he asked about news of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu again and again.
Word meanings
nityānanda - gosāñike — unto Lord Nityānanda Prabhu ; ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kaila namaskāra — offered obeisances ; sabe meli’ — meeting them all ; puche — inquires ; prabhura — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; vārtā — news ; bāra bāra — again and again .
Madhya-lila 6.23
Sourceমুকুন্দ কহে, — ‘মহাপ্রভু সন্ন্যাস করিয়া । নীলাচলে আইলা সঙ্গে আমা-সবা লঞা ॥ ২৩ ॥
mukunda kahe, — ‘mahāprabhu sannyāsa kariyā nīlācale āilā saṅge āmā-sabā lañā
English translation
Translation
Mukunda Datta continued, “After accepting the sannyāsa order, Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu has come to Jagannātha Purī and has brought all of us with Him.
Word meanings
mukunda kahe — Mukunda Datta replies ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sannyāsa kariyā — after accepting the renounced order of life ; nīlācale — to Jagannātha Purī ; āilā — has come ; saṅge — with Him ; āmā - sabā — all of us ; lañā — taking .
Madhya-lila 6.24
Sourceআমা-সবা ছাড়ি’ আগে গেলা দরশনে । আমি-সব পাছে আইলাঙ তাঁর অন্বেষণে ॥ ২৪ ॥
āmā-sabā chāḍi’ āge gelā daraśane āmi-saba pāche āilāṅ tāṅra anveṣaṇe
English translation
Translation
“Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu left our company and walked ahead to see Lord Jagannātha. We have just arrived and are now looking for Him.
Word meanings
āmā - sabā — all of us ; chāḍi’ — leaving ; āge — ahead ; gelā — went ; daraśane — to see Lord Jagannātha ; āmi - saba — all of us ; pāche — behind ; āilāṅ — came ; tāṅra — of Him ; anveṣaṇe — in search .
Madhya-lila 6.25
Sourceঅন্যোন্যে লোকের মুখে যে কথা শুনিল । সার্বভৌম-গৃহে প্রভু, — অনুমান কৈল ॥ ২৫ ॥
anyonye lokera mukhe ye kathā śunila sārvabhauma-gṛhe prabhu, — anumāna kaila
English translation
Translation
“From the talk of the people in general, we have guessed that the Lord is now at the house of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
anyonye — among themselves ; lokera — of the people in general ; mukhe — in the mouths ; ye — that which ; kathā — talk ; śunila — was heard ; sārvabhauma - gṛhe — at the home of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; prabhu — the Lord ; anumāna — a guess ; kaila — made .
Madhya-lila 6.26
Sourceঈশ্বর-দর্শনে প্রভু প্রেমে অচেতন । সার্বভৌম লঞা গেলা আপন-ভবন ॥ ২৬ ॥
īśvara-darśane prabhu preme acetana sārvabhauma lañā gelā āpana-bhavana
English translation
Translation
“Upon seeing Lord Jagannātha, Caitanya Mahāprabhu became ecstatic and fell unconscious, and Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya has taken Him to his home in this condition.
Word meanings
īśvara - darśane — by seeing Lord Jagannātha ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; preme — in the ecstasy of love of Godhead ; acetana — unconscious ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; lañā gelā — has taken ; āpana - bhavana — to his own home .
Madhya-lila 6.27
Sourceতোমার মিলনে যবে আমার হৈল মন । দৈবে সেই ক্ষণে পাইলুঁ তোমার দরশন ॥ ২৭ ॥
tomāra milane yabe āmāra haila mana daive sei kṣaṇe pāiluṅ tomāra daraśana
English translation
Translation
“Just as I was thinking of meeting you, by chance we have actually met.
Word meanings
tomāra — of you ; milane — in meeting ; yabe — when ; āmāra — of me ; haila — there was ; mana — the mind ; daive — by chance ; sei kṣaṇe — at that very moment ; pāiluṅ — got ; tomāra — your ; daraśana — meeting .
Madhya-lila 6.28
Sourceচল, সবে যাই সার্বভৌমের ভবন । প্রভু দেখি’ পাছে করিব ঈশ্বর দর্শন ॥’ ২৮ ॥
cala, sabe yāi sārvabhaumera bhavana prabhu dekhi’ pāche kariba īśvara darśana’
English translation
Translation
“First let us all go to the house of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya and see Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Later we shall come to see Lord Jagannātha.”
Word meanings
cala — let us go ; sabe — all ; yāi — we shall go ; sārvabhaumera bhavana — to the house of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; prabhu dekhi’ — seeing Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; pāche — later ; kariba — we shall do ; īśvara darśana — seeing of Lord Jagannātha .
Madhya-lila 6.29
Sourceএত শুনি’ গোপীনাথ সবারে লঞা । সার্বভৌম-ঘরে গেলা হরষিত হঞা ॥ ২৯ ॥
eta śuni’ gopīnātha sabāre lañā sārvabhauma-ghare gelā haraṣita hañā
English translation
Translation
Hearing this and feeling very pleased, Gopīnātha Ācārya immediately took all the devotees with him and approached the house of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
eta śuni’ — hearing this ; gopīnātha — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; sabāre — all of them ; lañā — taking with him ; sārvabhauma - ghare — to the house of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; gelā — went ; haraṣita hañā — becoming very pleased .
Madhya-lila 6.30
Sourceসার্বভৌম-স্থানে গিয়া প্রভুকে দেখিল । প্রভু দেখি’ আচার্যের দুঃখ-হর্ষ হৈল ॥ ৩০ ॥
sārvabhauma-sthāne giyā prabhuke dekhila prabhu dekhi’ ācāryera duḥkha-harṣa haila
English translation
Translation
Arriving at the home of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, everyone saw the Lord lying unconscious. Seeing Him in this condition, Gopīnātha Ācārya became very unhappy, but at the same time he was happy just to see the Lord.
Word meanings
sārvabhauma - sthāne — to the place of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; giyā — going there ; prabhuke — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; dekhila — all of them saw ; prabhu dekhi’ — seeing the Lord ; ācāryera — of Gopīnātha Ācārya ; duḥkha — unhappiness ; harṣa — happiness ; haila — there was .
Madhya-lila 6.31
Sourceসার্বভৌমে জানাঞা সবা নিল অভ্যন্তরে । নিত্যানন্দ-গোসাঞিরে তেঁহো কৈল নমস্কারে ॥ ৩১ ॥
sārvabhaume jānāñā sabā nila abhyantare nityānanda-gosāñire teṅho kaila namaskāre
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya permitted all the devotees to enter his house, and upon seeing Nityānanda Prabhu, the Bhaṭṭācārya offered Him obeisances.
Word meanings
sārvabhaume — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; jānāñā — informing and taking permission ; sabā — all the devotees ; nila — took ; abhyantare — within the house ; nityānanda - gosāñire — unto Nityānanda Prabhu ; teṅho — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kaila — offered ; namaskāre — obeisances .
Madhya-lila 6.32
Sourceসবা সহিত যথাযোগ্য করিল মিলন । প্রভু দেখি’ সবার হৈল হরষিত মন ॥ ৩২ ॥
sabā sahita yathā-yogya karila milana prabhu dekhi’ sabāra haila haraṣita mana
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma met with all the devotees and offered them a proper welcome. They were all pleased to see Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
sabā sahita — with all of them ; yathā - yogya — as it was befitting ; karila — did ; milana — meeting ; prabhu dekhi’ — seeing the Lord ; sabāra — of all ; haila — became ; haraṣita — pleased ; mana — the minds .
Madhya-lila 6.33
Sourceসার্বভৌম পাঠাইল সবা দর্শন করিতে । ‘চন্দনেশ্বর’ নিজপুত্র দিল সবার সাথে ॥ ৩৩ ॥
sārvabhauma pāṭhāila sabā darśana karite ‘candaneśvara’ nija-putra dila sabāra sāthe
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya then sent them all back to see Lord Jagannātha, and he asked his own son, Candaneśvara, to accompany them as a guide.
Word meanings
sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; pāṭhāila — sent them ; sabā — all ; darśana karite — to see Lord Jagannātha ; candana - īśvara — of the name Candaneśvara ; nija - putra — his son ; dila — gave ; sabāra sāthe — with all of them .
Madhya-lila 6.34
Sourceজগন্নাথ দেখি’ সবার হইল আনন্দ । ভাবেতে আবিষ্ট হৈলা প্রভু নিত্যানন্দ ॥ ৩৪ ॥
jagannātha dekhi’ sabāra ha-ila ānanda bhāvete āviṣṭa hailā prabhu nityānanda
English translation
Translation
Everyone was then very pleased to see the Deity of Lord Jagannātha. Lord Nityānanda in particular was overwhelmed with ecstasy.
Word meanings
jagannātha dekhi’ — seeing Lord Jagannātha ; sabāra — of everyone ; ha - ila — there was ; ānanda — pleasure ; bhāvete — in ecstasy ; āviṣṭa — overwhelmed ; hailā — became ; prabhu nityānanda — Lord Nityānanda .
Madhya-lila 6.35
Sourceসবে মেলি’ ধরি তাঁরে সুস্থির করিল । ঈশ্বর-সেবক মালা-প্রসাদ আনি’ দিল ॥ ৩৫ ॥
sabe meli’ dhari tāṅre susthira karila īśvara-sevaka mālā-prasāda āni’ dila
English translation
Translation
When Lord Nityānanda Prabhu nearly fainted, all the devotees caught Him and steadied Him. At that time, the priest of Lord Jagannātha brought a garland that had been offered to the Deity and offered it to Nityānanda Prabhu.
Word meanings
sabe meli’ — meeting all together ; dhari — caught ; tāṅre — Him ; su - sthira — steady ; karila — made ; īśvara - sevaka — the priest of the Deity ; mālā — garland ; prasāda — offering ; āni — bringing ; dila — gave .
Madhya-lila 6.36
Sourceপ্রসাদ পাঞা সবে হৈলা আনন্দিত মনে । পুনরপি আইলা সবে মহাপ্রভুর স্থানে ॥ ৩৬ ॥
prasāda pāñā sabe hailā ānandita mane punarapi āilā sabe mahāprabhura sthāne
English translation
Translation
Everyone was pleased to receive this garland worn by Lord Jagannātha. Afterwards they all returned to the place where Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was staying.
Word meanings
prasāda pāñā — getting this honor of the garland ; sabe — all of them ; hailā — became ; ānandita mane — pleased in the mind ; punarapi — again ; āilā — came back ; sabe — all ; mahāprabhura sthāne — to the place where Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was staying .
Madhya-lila 6.37
Sourceউচ্চ করি’ করে সবে নাম-সংকীর্তন । তৃতীয় প্রহরে হৈল প্রভুর চেতন ॥ ৩৭ ॥
ucca kari’ kare sabe nāma-saṅkīrtana tṛtīya prahare haila prabhura cetana
English translation
Translation
All of the devotees then began to loudly chant the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra. Just before noon the Lord regained His consciousness.
Word meanings
ucca — very loudly ; kari’ — doing ; kare — began ; sabe — all ; nāma - saṅkīrtana — chanting of the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra ; tṛtīya prahare — in the forenoon ; haila — there was ; prabhura — of Lord Caitanya ; cetana — consciousness .
Madhya-lila 6.38
Sourceহুঙ্কার করিয়া উঠে ‘হরি’ ‘হরি’ বলি’ । আনন্দে সার্বভৌম তাঁর লৈল পদধূলি ॥ ৩৮ ॥
huṅkāra kariyā uṭhe ‘hari’ ‘hari’ bali’ ānande sārvabhauma tāṅra laila pada-dhūli
English translation
Translation
Caitanya Mahāprabhu got up and very loudly chanted, “Hari! Hari!” Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was very pleased to see the Lord regain consciousness, and he took the dust of the Lord’s lotus feet.
Word meanings
huṅkāra kariyā — making a loud sound ; uṭhe — got up ; hari hari bali’ — chanting Hari, Hari ; ānande — in pleasure ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; tāṅra — His ; laila — took ; pada - dhūli — the dust of the feet .
Madhya-lila 6.39
Sourceসার্বভৌম কহে, — শীঘ্র করহ মধ্যাহ্ন । মুঞি ভিক্ষা দিমু আজি মহা-প্রসাদান্ন ॥ ৩৯ ॥
sārvabhauma kahe, — śīghra karaha madhyāhna muñi bhikṣā dimu āji mahā-prasādānna
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya informed all of them, “Please take your midday baths immediately. Today I shall offer you mahā-prasādam, the remnants of food offered to Lord Jagannātha.”
Word meanings
sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kahe — says ; śīghra — very soon ; karaha — do ; madhya - ahna — midday duties ; muñi — I ; bhikṣā — alms ; dimu — shall offer ; āji — today ; mahā - prasāda - anna — remnants of food offered to Lord Jagannātha .
Madhya-lila 6.40
Sourceসমুদ্রস্নান করি’ মহাপ্রভু শীঘ্র আইলা । চরণ পাখালি’ প্রভু আসনে বসিলা ॥ ৪০ ॥
samudra-snāna kari’ mahāprabhu śīghra āilā caraṇa pākhāli’ prabhu āsane vasilā
English translation
Translation
After bathing in the sea, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and His devotees returned very soon. The Lord then washed His feet and sat down on a carpet to take lunch.
Word meanings
samudra - snāna — a bath in the sea ; kari’ — taking ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śīghra — very soon ; āilā — returned ; caraṇa — feet ; pākhāli’ — washing ; prabhu — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āsane — on a seat ; vasilā — sat .
Madhya-lila 6.41
Sourceবহুত প্রসাদ সার্বভৌম আনাইল । তবে মহাপ্রভু সুখে ভোজন করিল ॥ ৪১ ॥
bahuta prasāda sārvabhauma ānāila tabe mahāprabhu sukhe bhojana karila
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya made arrangements to bring various kinds of mahā-prasādam from the Jagannātha temple. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu then accepted lunch with great happiness.
Word meanings
bahuta prasāda — varieties of food offered to Lord Jagannātha ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; ānāila — caused to bring them ; tabe — at that time ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sukhe — in happiness ; bhojana — lunch ; karila — accepted .
Madhya-lila 6.42
Sourceসুবর্ণ-থালীর অন্ন উত্তম ব্যঞ্জন । ভক্তগণ-সঙ্গে প্রভু করেন ভোজন ॥ ৪২ ॥
suvarṇa-thālīra anna uttama vyañjana bhakta-gaṇa-saṅge prabhu karena bhojana
English translation
Translation
Caitanya Mahāprabhu was offered special rice and first-class vegetables on golden plates. He thus took lunch in the company of His devotees.
Word meanings
suvarṇa - thālīra — on golden plates ; anna — rice ; uttama — first-class ; vyañjana — vegetables ; bhakta - gaṇa — the devotees ; saṅge — with ; prabhu — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; karena — accepts ; bhojana — lunch .
Madhya-lila 6.43
Sourceসার্বভৌম পরিবেশন করেন আপনে । প্রভু কহে, — মোরে দেহ লাফ্রা-ব্যঞ্জনে ॥ ৪৩ ॥
sārvabhauma pariveśana karena āpane prabhu kahe, — more deha lāphrā-vyañjane
English translation
Translation
While Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya personally distributed the prasādam, Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu requested him, “Please give Me only boiled vegetables.
Word meanings
sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; pariveśana — distribution ; karena — does ; āpane — personally ; prabhu kahe — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu said ; more — unto Me ; deha — please give ; lāphrā - vyañjane — boiled vegetables .
Purport
Lāphrā-vyañjana is a preparation in which many vegetables are boiled together, and then a cheṅkā is added, consisting of spices like cumin, black pepper and mustard seed.
Madhya-lila 6.44
Sourceপীঠা-পানা দেহ তুমি ইঁহা-সবাকারে । তবে ভট্টাচার্য কহে যুড়ি’ দুই করে ॥ ৪৪ ॥
pīṭhā-pānā deha tumi iṅhā-sabākāre tabe bhaṭṭācārya kahe yuḍi’ dui kare
English translation
Translation
“You can offer the cakes and preparations made with condensed milk to all the devotees.” Hearing this, the Bhaṭṭācārya folded his hands and spoke as follows.
Word meanings
pīṭhā - pānā — cakes and condensed-milk preparations ; deha — give ; tumi — you ; iṅhā - sabākāre — to all these devotees ; tabe — at that time ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kahe — said ; yuḍi’ — folding ; dui kare — two hands .
Madhya-lila 6.45
Sourceজগন্নাথ কৈছে করিয়াছেন ভোজন । আজি সব মহাপ্রসাদ কর আস্বাদন ॥ ৪৫ ॥
jagannātha kaiche kariyāchena bhojana āji saba mahāprasāda kara āsvādana
English translation
Translation
“Today, all of you please try to taste the lunch just as Lord Jagannātha accepted it.”
Word meanings
jagannātha — Lord Jagannātha ; kaiche — as ; kariyāchena — has accepted ; bhojana — lunch ; āji — today ; saba — all of you ; mahā - prasāda — the remnants of food offered to the Lord ; kara — do ; āsvādana — tasting .
Madhya-lila 6.46
Sourceএত বলি’ পীঠা-পানা সব খাওয়াইলা । ভিক্ষা করাঞা আচমন করাইলা ॥ ৪৬ ॥
eta bali’ pīṭhā-pānā saba khāoyāilā bhikṣā karāñā ācamana karāilā
English translation
Translation
After saying this, he made them all eat the various cakes and condensed-milk preparations. After feeding them, he offered them water to wash their hands, feet and mouths.
Word meanings
eta bali’ — saying this ; pīṭhā - pānā — many kinds of cakes and condensed-milk preparations ; saba — all ; khāoyāilā — made to eat ; bhikṣā karāñā — after offering prasādam ; ācamana karāilā — made them wash their hands, feet and mouths .
Madhya-lila 6.47
Sourceআজ্ঞা মাগি’ গেলা গোপীনাথ আচার্যকে লঞা । প্রভুর নিকট আইলা ভোজন করিঞা ॥ ৪৭ ॥
ājñā māgi’ gelā gopīnātha ācāryake lañā prabhura nikaṭa āilā bhojana kariñā
English translation
Translation
Begging permission from Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu and His devotees, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya then went with Gopīnātha Ācārya to take lunch. After finishing their lunch, they returned to Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
ājñā māgi’ — taking permission ; gelā — went ; gopīnātha ācāryake lañā — taking Gopīnātha Ācārya ; prabhura — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nikaṭa — near ; āilā — went ; bhojana kariñā — after taking lunch .
Madhya-lila 6.48
Source‘নমো নারায়ণায়’ বলি’ নমস্কার কৈল । ‘কৃষ্ণে মতিরস্তু’ বলি’ গোসাঞি কহিল ॥ ৪৮ ॥
‘namo nārāyaṇāya’ bali’ namaskāra kaila ‘kṛṣṇe matir astu’ bali’ gosāñi kahila
English translation
Translation
Offering his obeisances to Caitanya Mahāprabhu, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said, “Namo nārāyaṇāya” [“I offer my obeisances to Nārāyaṇa”].
Word meanings
namaḥ nārāyaṇāya — I offer my respects to Nārāyaṇa ; bali’ — saying ; namaskāra kaila — offered respects to Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kṛṣṇe — unto Lord Kṛṣṇa ; matiḥ astu — let there be attraction ; bali’ — saying ; gosāñi — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kahila — spoke .
Purport
In return, Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “Kṛṣṇe matir astu” [“Let your attention be on Kṛṣṇa”].
It is the etiquette among sannyāsīs, those on the fourth platform of spiritual life, to offer respects by saying oṁ namo nārāyaṇāya (“I offer my respectful obeisances unto Nārāyaṇa”). This greeting is used especially by Māyāvādī sannyāsīs. According to the smṛti scriptures, a sannyāsī should not expect anything from anyone, nor should he consider himself identical with the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Vaiṣṇava sannyāsīs never think of themselves as being one with the Lord; they always consider themselves eternal servants of Kṛṣṇa, and they want to see everyone in the world become Kṛṣṇa conscious. For this reason, a Vaiṣṇava sannyāsī always offers his blessings to everyone, saying kṛṣṇe matir astu (“May you become Kṛṣṇa conscious”).
Madhya-lila 6.49
Sourceশুনি’ সার্বভৌম মনে বিচার করিল । বৈষ্ণব-সন্ন্যাসী ইঁহো, বচনে জানিল ॥ ৪৯ ॥
śuni’ sārvabhauma mane vicāra karila vaiṣṇava-sannyāsī iṅho, vacane jānila
English translation
Translation
Hearing these words, Sārvabhauma understood Lord Caitanya to be a Vaiṣṇava sannyāsī.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing this ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; mane — within the mind ; vicāra karila — considered ; vaiṣṇava - sannyāsī — Vaiṣṇava sannyāsī ; iṅho — this person ; vacane — by words ; jānila — understood .
Madhya-lila 6.50
Sourceগোপীনাথ আচার্যেরে কহে সার্বভৌম । গোসাঞির জানিতে চাহি কাহাঁ পূর্বাশ্রম ॥ ৫০ ॥
gopīnātha ācāryere kahe sārvabhauma gosāñira jānite cāhi kāhāṅ pūrvāśrama
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma then said to Gopīnātha Ācārya, “I want to know Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s previous situation.”
Word meanings
gopīnātha ācāryere — to Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kahe — said ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; gosāñira — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; jānite — to know ; cāhi — I want ; kāhāṅ — what ; pūrva - āśrama — previous situation .
Purport
The word pūrvāśrama refers to one’s previous situation in life. Sometimes a person will accept the renounced order from householder life, and sometimes even from student ( brahmacārī ) life. Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya wanted to know of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s previous situation as a householder.
Madhya-lila 6.51
Sourceগোপীনাথাচার্য কহে, — নবদ্বীপে ঘর । ‘জগন্নাথ’ নাম, পদবী — ‘মিশ্র পুরন্দর’ ॥ ৫১ ॥
gopīnāthācārya kahe, — navadvīpe ghara ‘jagannātha’ — nāma, padavī — ‘miśra purandara’
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya replied, “There was a man named Jagannātha, who was a resident of Navadvīpa, and whose surname was Miśra Purandara.
Word meanings
gopīnātha - ācārya kahe — Gopīnātha Ācārya replied ; navadvīpe — in Navadvīpa ; ghara — residence ; jagannātha — Jagannātha ; nāma — named ; padavī — the surname ; miśra purandara — Miśra Purandara .
Madhya-lila 6.52
Source‘বিশ্বম্ভর’ — নাম ইঁহার, তাঁর ইঁহো পুত্র । নীলাম্বর চক্রবর্তীর হয়েন দৌহিত্র ॥ ৫২ ॥
‘viśvambhara’ — nāma iṅhāra, tāṅra iṅho putra nīlāmbara cakravartīra hayena dauhitra
English translation
Translation
“Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu is the son of that Jagannātha Miśra, and His former name was Viśvambhara Miśra. He also happens to be the grandson of Nīlāmbara Cakravartī.”
Word meanings
viśvambhara — Viśvambhara ; nāma — the name ; iṅhāra — His ; tāṅra — of Jagannātha Miśra ; iṅho — He ; putra — son ; nīlāmbara cakravartīra — of Nīlāmbara Cakravartī ; hayena — is ; dauhitra — grandson (daughter’s son) .
Madhya-lila 6.53
Sourceসার্বভৌম কহে, — নীলাম্বর চক্রবর্তী । বিশারদের সমাধ্যায়ী, — এই তাঁর খ্যাতি ॥ ৫৩ ॥
sārvabhauma kahe, — nīlāmbara cakravartī viśāradera samādhyāyī, — ei tāṅra khyāti
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya said, “Nīlāmbara Cakravartī was a classmate of my father, Maheśvara Viśārada. I knew him as such.
Word meanings
sārvabhauma kahe — Sārvabhauma said ; nīlāmbara cakravartī — the gentleman named Nīlāmbara Cakravartī ; viśāradera — of Maheśvara Viśārada (Sārvabhauma’s father) ; samādhyāyī — class friend ; ei — this ; tāṅra — of him ; khyāti — acquaintance .
Madhya-lila 6.54
Source‘মিশ্র পুরন্দর’ তাঁর মান্য, হেন জানি । পিতার সম্বন্ধে দোঁহাকে পূজ্য করি’ মানি ॥ ৫৪ ॥
‘miśra purandara’ tāṅra mānya, hena jāni pitāra sambandhe doṅhāke pūjya kari’ māni
English translation
Translation
“Jagannātha Miśra Purandara was respected by my father. Thus because of their relationship with my father, I respect both Jagannātha Miśra and Nīlāmbara Cakravartī.”
Word meanings
miśra purandara — Jagannātha Miśra Purandara ; tāṅra — his ; mānya — respectable ; hena — thus ; jāni — I know ; pitāra sambandhe — in relationship to my father ; doṅhāke — both of them (Nīlāmbara Cakravartī and Jagannātha Miśra) ; pūjya — respectable ; kari’ — thinking ; māni — I accept .
Madhya-lila 6.55
Sourceনদীয়া-সম্বন্ধে সার্বভৌম হৃষ্ট হৈলা । প্রীত হঞা গোসাঞিরে কহিতে লাগিলা ॥ ৫৫ ॥
nadīyā-sambandhe sārvabhauma hṛṣṭa hailā prīta hañā gosāñire kahite lāgilā
English translation
Translation
Hearing that Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu belonged to the Nadia district, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya became very pleased and addressed the Lord as follows.
Word meanings
nadīyā - sambandhe — in connection with Nadia ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; hṛṣṭa — pleased ; hailā — became ; prīta hañā — thus being pleased ; gosāñire — unto Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kahite lāgilā — began to speak .
Madhya-lila 6.56
Source‘সহজেই পূজ্য তুমি, আরে ত’ সন্ন্যাস । অতএব হঙ তোমার আমি নিজ-দাস ॥’ ৫৬ ॥
‘sahajei pūjya tumi, āre ta’ sannyāsa ataeva haṅ tomāra āmi nija-dāsa’
English translation
Translation
“You are naturally respectable. Besides, You are a sannyāsī; thus I wish to become Your personal servant.”
Word meanings
sahajei — naturally ; pūjya — respectable ; tumi — You ; āre — over and above this ; ta’ — certainly ; sannyāsa — the renounced order of life ; ataeva — therefore ; haṅ — am ; tomāra — Your ; āmi — I ; nija - dāsa — personal servant .
Purport
A sannyāsī is always to be worshiped and offered all kinds of respect by the gṛhasthas (householders). Although Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was older than Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, Sārvabhauma respected Him as a sannyāsī and as one who had attained the topmost platform of spiritual ecstasy. Thus the Bhaṭṭācārya certainly accepted Him as his master.
Madhya-lila 6.57
Sourceশুনি’ মহাপ্রভু কৈল শ্রীবিষ্ণু স্মরণ । ভট্টাচার্যে কহে কিছু বিনয় বচন ॥ ৫৭ ॥
śuni’ mahāprabhu kaila śrī-viṣṇu smaraṇa bhaṭṭācārye kahe kichu vinaya vacana
English translation
Translation
As soon as Caitanya Mahāprabhu heard this from the Bhaṭṭācārya, He immediately remembered Lord Viṣṇu and began to speak humbly to him as follows.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing this ; mahāprabhu — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kaila — did ; śrī - viṣṇu smaraṇa — remembering Lord Viṣṇu ; bhaṭṭācārye — to Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kahe — speaks ; kichu — some ; vinaya vacana — very humble statements .
Madhya-lila 6.58
Source“তুমি জগদ্গুরু — সর্বলোক-হিতকর্তা । বেদান্ত পড়াও, সন্ন্যাসীর উপকর্তা ॥ ৫৮ ॥
“tumi jagad-guru — sarvaloka-hita-kartā vedānta paḍāo, sannyāsīra upakartā
English translation
Translation
“Because you are a teacher of Vedānta philosophy, you are the master of all the people in the world and their well-wisher as well. You are also the benefactor of all kinds of sannyāsīs.
Word meanings
tumi jagat - guru — you are the master of all people ; sarva - loka — of all people ; hita - kartā — the well-wisher ; vedānta paḍāo — you teach Vedānta philosophy ; sannyāsīra — of the mendicants in the renounced order of life ; upakartā — the benefactor .
Purport
Because the Māyāvādī sannyāsīs teach Vedānta philosophy to their students or disciples, they are customarily called jagad-guru. This indicates that they are the benefactors of all people. Although Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was not a sannyāsī but a householder, he used to invite all the sannyāsīs to his home and offer them prasādam. Thus he was accepted as the best well-wisher and friend of all the sannyāsīs.
Madhya-lila 6.59
Sourceআমি বালক-সন্ন্যাসী — ভাল-মন্দ নাহি জানি । তোমার আশ্রয় নিলুঁ, গুরু করি’ মানি ॥ ৫৯ ॥
āmi bālaka-sannyāsī — bhānda-manda nāhi jāni tomāra āśraya niluṅ, guru kari’ māni
English translation
Translation
“I am a young sannyāsī, and I actually have no knowledge of what is good and what is bad. Therefore I am taking shelter of you and accepting you as My spiritual master.
Word meanings
āmi — I ; bālaka - sannyāsī — a young sannyāsī ; bhānda - manda — good and bad ; nāhi — not ; jāni — know ; tomāra — your ; āśraya — shelter ; niluṅ — have taken ; guru — spiritual master ; kari’ — taking as ; māni — I accept .
Madhya-lila 6.60
Sourceতোমার সঙ্গ লাগি’ মোর ইহাঁ আগমন । সর্বপ্রকারে করিবে আমায় পালন ॥ ৬০ ॥
tomāra saṅga lāgi’ mora ihāṅ āgamana sarva-prakāre karibe āmāya pālana
English translation
Translation
“I have come here only to associate with you, and I am now taking shelter of you. Will you kindly maintain Me in all respects?
Word meanings
tomāra — your ; saṅga — association ; lāgi’ — for the sake of ; mora — My ; ihāṅ — here ; āgamana — arrival ; sarva - prakāre — in all respects ; karibe — you will do ; āmāya — unto Me ; pālana — maintaining .
Madhya-lila 6.61
Sourceআজি যে হৈল আমার বড়ই বিপত্তি । তাহা হৈতে কৈলে তুমি আমার অব্যাহতি ॥” ৬১ ॥
āji ye haila āmāra baḍa-i vipatti tāhā haite kaile tumi āmāra avyāhati”
English translation
Translation
“The incident that happened today was a great obstacle for Me, but you have kindly relieved Me of it.”
Word meanings
āji — today ; ye — that which ; haila — happened ; āmāra — My ; baḍa - i — very great ; vipatti — obstacle ; tāhā — that danger ; haite — from ; kaile — did ; tumi — you ; āmāra — My ; avyāhati — relief .
Madhya-lila 6.62
Sourceভট্টাচার্য কহে, — একলে তুমি না যাইহ দর্শনে । আমার সঙ্গে যাবে, কিম্বা আমার লোক-সনে ॥ ৬২ ॥
bhaṭṭācārya kahe, — ekale tumi nā yāiha darśane āmāra saṅge yābe, kimvā āmāra loka-sane
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya replied, “Do not go alone to see the Deity at the Jagannātha temple. It is better that You go with me or my men.”
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya kahe — the Bhaṭṭācārya said ; ekale — alone ; tumi — You ; nā — not ; yāiha — go ; darśane — to see the Deity ; āmāra saṅge — with me ; yābe — You should go ; kimvā — or ; āmāra loka - sane — with my men .
Madhya-lila 6.63
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, — ‘মন্দির ভিতরে না যাইব । গরুড়ের পাশে রহি’ দর্শন করিব ॥’ ৬৩ ॥
prabhu kahe, — ‘mandira bhitare nā yāiba garuḍera pāśe rahi’ darśana kariba’
English translation
Translation
The Lord said, “I shall never enter the temple but shall always view the Lord from the side of the Garuḍa-stambha.”
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — Śrī Caitanya replied ; mandira — the temple ; bhitare — inside ; nā — never ; yāiba — I shall go ; garuḍera — of the column known as the Garuḍa-stambha ; pāśe — by the side ; rahi’ — staying ; darśana — seeing ; kariba — I shall do .
Madhya-lila 6.64
Sourceগোপীনাথাচার্যকে কহে সার্বভৌম । ‘তুমি গোসাঞিরে লঞা করাইহ দরশন ॥ ৬৪ ॥
gopīnāthācāryake kahe sārvabhauma ‘tumi gosāñire lañā karāiha daraśana
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya then told Gopīnātha Ācārya, “Take Gosvāmījī and show Him Lord Jagannātha.
Word meanings
gopīnātha - ācāryake — to Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kahe — says ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; tumi — you ; gosāñire — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; lañā — taking ; karāiha — make Him do ; daraśana — seeing of Lord Jagannātha .
Madhya-lila 6.65
Sourceআমার মাতৃষসা-গৃহ — নির্জন স্থান । তাহাঁ বাসা দেহ, কর সর্ব সমাধান ॥’ ৬৫ ॥
āmāra mātṛ-svasā-gṛha — nirjana sthāna tāhāṅ vāsā deha, kara sarva samādhāna’
English translation
Translation
“Also, the apartment belonging to my maternal aunt is in a very solitary place. Make all arrangements for Him to stay there.”
Word meanings
āmāra — my ; mātṛ - svasā — of the aunt ; gṛha — the home ; nirjana sthāna — very solitary place ; tāhāṅ — there ; vāsā — an apartment ; deha — give ; kara — make ; sarva — all ; samādhāna — arrangements .
Madhya-lila 6.66
Sourceগোপীনাথ প্রভু লঞা তাহাঁ বাসা দিল । জল, জলপাত্রাদিক সর্ব সমাধান কৈল ॥ ৬৬ ॥
gopīnātha prabhu lañā tāhāṅ vāsā dila jala, jala-pātrādika sarva samādhāna kaila
English translation
Translation
Thus Gopīnātha Ācārya took Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu to His residential quarters and showed Him where to find water, tubs and waterpots. Indeed, he arranged everything.
Word meanings
gopīnātha — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; prabhu — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; lañā — taking ; tāhāṅ — there ; vāsā — apartment ; dila — gave ; jala — water ; jala - pātra - ādika — waterpots and other vessels ; sarva — all ; samādhāna — arrangements ; kaila — made .
Madhya-lila 6.67
Sourceআর দিন গোপীনাথ প্রভু স্থানে গিয়া । শয্যোত্থান দরশন করাইল লঞা ॥ ৬৭ ॥
āra dina gopīnātha prabhu sthāne giyā śayyotthāna daraśana karāila lañā
English translation
Translation
The next day Gopīnātha Ācārya took Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu to see the early rising of Lord Jagannātha.
Word meanings
āra dina — the next day ; gopīnātha — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; prabhu — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sthāne — to the place ; giyā — going ; śayyā - utthāna — the rising from bed of Lord Jagannātha ; daraśana — seeing ; karāila — caused ; lañā — taking Him .
Madhya-lila 6.68
Sourceমুকুন্দদত্ত লঞা আইলা সার্বভৌম স্থানে । সার্বভৌম কিছু তাঁরে বলিলা বচনে ॥ ৬৮ ॥
mukunda-datta lañā āilā sārvabhauma sthāne sārvabhauma kichu tāṅre balilā vacane
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya then took Mukunda Datta with him and went to Sārvabhauma’s house. When they arrived, Sārvabhauma addressed Mukunda Datta as follows.
Word meanings
mukunda - datta — Mukunda Datta ; lañā — taking ; āilā — went ; sārvabhauma — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; sthāne — to the place ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kichu — something ; tāṅre — to Mukunda Datta ; balilā — said ; vacane — in words .
Madhya-lila 6.69
Source‘প্রকৃতি-বিনীত, সন্ন্যাসী দেখিতে সুন্দর । আমার বহুপ্রীতি বাড়ে ইঁহার উপর ॥ ৬৯ ॥
‘prakṛti-vinīta, sannyāsī dekhite sundara āmāra bahu-prīti bāḍe iṅhāra upara
English translation
Translation
“The sannyāsī is very meek and humble by nature, and His person is very beautiful to see. Consequently my affection for Him increases.
Word meanings
prakṛti - vinīta — by nature very humble and meek ; sannyāsī — renouncer ; dekhite — to see ; sundara — very beautiful ; āmāra — my ; bahu - prīti — great affection ; bāḍe — increases ; iṅhāra — Him ; upara — upon .
Purport
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya considered Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu a very humble and meek person because although Caitanya Mahāprabhu was a sannyāsī, He still retained His brahmacārī name. The Lord took sannyāsa from Keśava Bhāratī in the Bhāratī sampradāya, in which the brahmacārīs (the assistants of the sannyāsīs ) are named “Caitanya.” Even after accepting sannyāsa, Caitanya Mahāprabhu retained the name “Caitanya,” meaning a humble servant of a sannyāsī. Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya appreciated this very much.
Madhya-lila 6.70
Sourceকোন্ সম্প্রদায়ে সন্ন্যাস কর্যাছেন গ্রহণ । কিবা নাম ইঁহার, শুনিতে হয় মন ॥’ ৭০ ॥
kon sampradāye sannyāsa karyāchena grahaṇa kibā nāma iṅhāra, śunite haya mana’
English translation
Translation
“From which sampradāya has He accepted the sannyāsa order, and what is His name?”
Word meanings
kon sampradāye — in which community ; sannyāsa — the renounced order of life ; karyāchena — has made ; grahaṇa — acceptance ; kibā — what ; nāma — name ; iṅhāra — His ; śunite — to hear ; haya — it is ; mana — my mind .
Madhya-lila 6.71
Sourceগোপীনাথ কহে, — নাম শ্রীকৃষ্ণচৈতন্য । গুরু ইঁহার কেশব-ভারতী মহাধন্য ॥ ৭১ ॥
gopīnātha kahe, — nāma śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya guru iṅhāra keśava-bhāratī mahā-dhanya
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya replied, “The Lord’s name is Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya, and His sannyāsa preceptor is the greatly fortunate Keśava Bhāratī.”
Word meanings
gopīnātha kahe — Gopīnātha Ācārya replied ; nāma — His name ; śrī - kṛṣṇa - caitanya — Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya ; guru — sannyāsa-guru ; iṅhāra — His ; keśava - bhāratī — of the name Keśava Bhāratī ; mahā - dhanya — the greatly fortunate personality .
Madhya-lila 6.72
Sourceসার্বভৌম কহে, — ‘ইঁহার নাম সর্বোত্তম । ভারতী সম্প্রদায় ইঁহো — হয়েন মধ্যম ॥’ ৭২ ॥
sārvabhauma kahe, — ‘iṅhāra nāma sarvottama bhāratī-sampradāya iṅho — hayena madhyama’
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said, “ ‘Śrī Kṛṣṇa’ is a very good name, but He belongs to the Bhāratī community. Therefore He is a second-class sannyāsī.”
Word meanings
sārvabhauma kahe — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied ; iṅhāra — His ; nāma — name ; sarva - uttama — first-class ; bhāratī - sampradāya — the community of the Bhāratī sannyāsīs ; iṅho — He ; hayena — becomes ; madhyama — middle-class .
Madhya-lila 6.73
Sourceগোপীনাথ কহে, — ইঁহার নাহি বাহ্যাপেক্ষা । অতএব বড় সম্প্রদায়ের নাহিক অপেক্ষা ॥ ৭৩ ॥
gopīnātha kahe, — iṅhāra nāhi bāhyāpekṣā ataeva baḍa sampradāyera nāhika apekṣā
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya replied, “Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu does not rely on any external formality. There is no need for Him to accept the sannyāsa order from a superior sampradāya.”
Word meanings
gopīnātha kahe — Gopīnātha Ācārya replied ; iṅhāra — of the Lord ; nāhi — there is not ; bāhya - apekṣā — dependence on any external formality ; ataeva — therefore ; baḍa — big ; sampradāyera — of a community ; nāhika — there is not ; apekṣā — necessity .
Purport
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu accepted sannyāsa from the Bhāratī sampradāya (community), which belongs to the disciplic succession of Śaṅkarācārya. Śaṅkarācārya introduced names for his sannyāsa disciples, and these are ten in number. Out of these, the surnames Tīrtha, Āśrama and Sarasvatī are considered topmost. In the monastery at Śṛṅgerī, the surname Sarasvatī is considered first class, Bhāratī second class and Purī third class. A sannyāsī who has very nicely understood the slogan tat tvam asi and who takes his bath at the confluence of the rivers Ganges, Yamunā and Sarasvatī is called a Tīrtha. A person who is very eager to accept sannyāsa, who is detached from worldly activities, who has no desire for any kind of material facilities, and who is thus saved from repeated birth and death is known as Āśrama. When a sannyāsī lives in a beautiful, solitary place in the forest and is freed from all material desires, he is called Vana. A sannyāsī who always lives in the forest and renounces all connection with the world in order to be elevated to the heavenly planets, where he can live in the Nandana-kānana , is called Araṇya. One who prefers living in the mountains engaging in the study of the Bhagavad-gītā and whose intelligence is fixed is called Giri. One who prefers living in great mountains, even among ferocious animals, to attain the summit of philosophical speculation (understanding that the essence of this material world is useless) is called Parvata. A sannyāsī who has dipped into the ocean of the Absolute Truth and collected some valuable stones of knowledge from that ocean, who never falls from the regulative principles of a sannyāsī, is called Sāgara. One who has learned the classical art of music, who engages in its culture, and who has become expert and completely aloof from material attachment is called Sarasvatī. Sarasvatī is the goddess of music and learning, and in one hand she holds a musical instrument called a vīṇā. A sannyāsī who is always engaged in music for spiritual elevation is called Sarasvatī. One who has become completely educated and is freed from all kinds of ignorance and who is never unhappy, even in a distressed condition, is called Bhāratī. One who has become very expert in absolute knowledge, who is situated in the Absolute Truth, and who always discusses the Absolute Truth is called Purī.
All these sannyāsīs are assisted by brahmacārīs, who are described as follows: One who knows his real identity and is fixed in his particular occupational duty, who is always happy in spiritual understanding, is called Svarūpa-brahmacārī. One who completely knows the Brahman effulgence and is always engaged in the practice of yoga is called Prakāśa-brahmacārī. One who has acquired absolute knowledge and who always meditates on the Absolute Truth, knowledge, the unlimited and the Brahman effulgence, thus keeping himself in transcendental bliss, is called Ānanda-brahmacārī. One who is able to distinguish between matter and spirit, who is never disturbed by material transformations, and who meditates on the unlimited, inexhaustible, auspicious Brahman effulgence is a first-class, learned brahmacārī and is named Caitanya.
When Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was talking with Gopīnātha Ācārya about Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s sannyāsa community, he appreciated the first name, “Śrī Kṛṣṇa,” but did not like the surname, “Caitanya,” which is the name for a brahmacārī belonging to the Bhāratī community. He therefore suggested that the Lord be elevated to the Sarasvatī community. However, Gopīnātha Ācārya pointed out that the Lord does not depend on any external formality. Gopīnātha Ācārya was firmly convinced that Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was Kṛṣṇa Himself and therefore independent of any external ritual or formality. If one wants to engage in pure devotional service, he does not require titular superiority as a Bhāratī or a Sarasvatī.
Madhya-lila 6.74
Sourceভট্টাচার্য কহে, — ‘ইঁহার প্রৌঢ় যৌবন । কেমতে সন্ন্যাস-ধর্ম হইবে রক্ষণ ॥ ৭৪ ॥
bhaṭṭācārya kahe, — ‘iṅhāra prauḍha yauvana kemate sannyāsa-dharma ha-ibe rakṣaṇa
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya inquired, “Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is in His full-fledged youthful life. How can He keep the principles of sannyāsa?
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya kahe — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied ; iṅhāra — His ; prauḍha — full ; yauvana — youth ; kemate — how ; sannyāsa - dharma — principles of a sannyāsī ; ha - ibe — there will be ; rakṣaṇa — protection .
Madhya-lila 6.75
Sourceনিরন্তর ইঁহাকে বেদান্ত শুনাইব । বৈরাগ্য-অদ্বৈত-মার্গে প্রবেশ করাইব ॥ ৭৫ ॥
nirantara iṅhāke vedānta śunāiba vairāgya-advaita-mārge praveśa karāiba
English translation
Translation
“I shall continually recite Vedānta philosophy before Caitanya Mahāprabhu so that He may remain fixed in His renunciation and thus enter upon the path of monism.”
Word meanings
nirantara — continually ; iṅhāke — to Him ; vedānta — Vedānta philosophy ; śunāiba — I shall recite ; vairāgya — of renunciation ; advaita — of monism ; mārge — on the path ; praveśa — entrance ; karāiba — I shall cause Him to make .
Purport
According to Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, among sannyāsīs the cultivation of Vedānta philosophy helps in becoming detached from sense gratification. Thus a sannyāsī can protect the prestige of wearing a loincloth ( kaupīna ). One has to practice sense control as well as mind control and subdue the six forces of speech, mind, anger, tongue, belly and genitals. Then one can become expert in understanding the devotional service of the Lord and thus become a perfect sannyāsī. For that purpose one must cultivate knowledge and renunciation regularly. When one is attached to material sense gratification, he cannot protect his sannyāsa order. Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya suggested that by the study of vairāgya (renunciation) Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu might be saved from the clutches of full-fledged youthful desires.
Madhya-lila 6.76
Sourceকহেন যদি, পুনরপি যোগ-পট্ট দিয়া । সংস্কার করিয়ে উত্তম-সম্প্রদায়ে আনিয়া ॥’ ৭৬ ॥
kahena yadi, punarapi yoga-paṭṭa diyā saṁskāra kariye uttama-sampradāye āniyā’
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya then suggested, “If Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu would like, I could bring Him into a first-class sampradāya by offering Him saffron cloth and performing the reformatory process again.”
Word meanings
kahena — says ; yadi — if ; punarapi — again ; yoga - paṭṭa diyā — offering Him saffron cloth ; saṁskāra — reformatory process ; kariye — I perform ; uttama — first-class ; sampradāye — to the community ; āniyā — bringing .
Purport
The Bhaṭṭācārya wanted to reinstate Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu into the Sarasvatī sampradāya because he did not like the Lord’s belonging to the Bhāratī sampradāya or Purī sampradāya. Actually, he did not know the position of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu. As the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Caitanya Mahāprabhu did not depend on an inferior or superior sampradāya. The Supreme Personality of Godhead remains in the supreme position in all circumstances.
Madhya-lila 6.77
Sourceশুনি’ গোপীনাথ-মুকুন্দ দুঁহে দুঃখী হৈলা । গোপীনাথাচার্য কিছু কহিতে লাগিলা ॥ ৭৭ ॥
śuni’ gopīnātha-mukunda duṅhe duḥkhī hailā gopīnāthācārya kichu kahite lāgilā
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya and Mukunda Datta became very unhappy when they heard this. Gopīnātha Ācārya therefore addressed Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya as follows.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing ; gopīnātha - mukunda — Gopīnātha Ācārya and Mukunda Datta ; duṅhe — both ; duḥkhī — unhappy ; hailā — became ; gopīnātha - ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kichu — something ; kahite — to speak ; lāgilā — began .
Madhya-lila 6.78
Source‘ভট্টাচার্য তুমি ইঁহার না জান মহিমা । ভগবত্তা-লক্ষণের ইঁহাতেই সীমা ॥ ৭৮ ॥
‘bhaṭṭācārya’ tumi iṅhāra nā jāna mahimā bhagavattā-lakṣaṇera iṅhātei sīmā
English translation
Translation
“My dear Bhaṭṭācārya, you do not know the greatness of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu. All the symptoms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are found in Him to the highest degree.”
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya — my dear Bhaṭṭācārya ; tumi — you ; iṅhāra — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nā — not ; jāna — know ; mahimā — the greatness ; bhagavattā — of being the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; lakṣaṇera — of symptoms ; iṅhātei — in Him ; sīmā — the highest degree .
Purport
Since the Bhaṭṭācārya was an impersonalist, he had no idea of the Absolute Truth beyond the impersonal effulgence. However, Gopīnātha Ācārya informed him that Caitanya Mahāprabhu was the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Those who know the Absolute Truth know it in three phases, as explained in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.2.11) :
vadanti tat tattva-vidas tattvaṁ yaj jñānam advayam brahmeti paramātmeti bhagavān iti śabdyate
“Those who are in knowledge of the nondual Absolute Truth know very clearly what is Brahman, what is Paramātmā, and what is the Supreme Personality of Godhead.” The Supreme Personality of Godhead is ṣaḍ-aiśvarya-pūrṇa, complete with six opulences. Gopīnātha Ācārya emphasized that all those six opulences were completely existing in Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Madhya-lila 6.79
Sourceতাহাতে বিখ্যাত ইঁহো পরম-ঈশ্বর । অজ্ঞ-স্থানে কিছু নহে বিজ্ঞের গোচর ॥’ ৭৯ ॥
tāhāte vikhyāta iṅho parama-īśvara ajña-sthāne kichu nahe vijñera gocara’
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya continued, “Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu is celebrated as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Those who are ignorant in this connection find the conclusion of knowledgeable men very difficult to understand.”
Word meanings
tāhāte — therefore ; vikhyāta — celebrated ; iṅho — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; parama - īśvara — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; ajña - sthāne — before an ignorant person ; kichu — any ; nahe — not ; vijñera — of the person who knows ; gocara — information .
Madhya-lila 6.80
Sourceশিষ্যগণ কহে, — ‘ঈশ্বর কহ কোন্ প্রমাণে ।’ আচার্য কহে, — ‘বিজ্ঞমত ঈশ্বর-লক্ষণে ॥’ ৮০ ॥
śiṣya-gaṇa kahe, — ‘īśvara kaha kon pramāṇe’ ācārya kahe, — ‘vijña-mata īśvara-lakṣaṇe’
English translation
Translation
The disciples of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya retaliated, “By what evidence do you conclude that Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is the Supreme Lord?”
Word meanings
śiṣya - gaṇa kahe — the disciples of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said ; īśvara kaha — you say the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kon pramāṇe — by what evidence ; ācārya kahe — Gopīnātha Ācārya replied ; vijña - mata — statements of authorized persons ; īśvara - lakṣaṇe — in understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead .
Purport
Gopīnātha Ācārya replied, “The statements of authorized ācāryas who understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead are proof.”
Since the appearance of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, there have been many pseudo incarnations in India who do not present authorized evidence. Five hundred years ago the disciples of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, being very learned scholars, were certainly right in asking Gopīnātha Ācārya for evidence. If a person proposes that he himself is God or that someone else is an incarnation of God or God Himself, he must cite evidence from śāstra to prove his claim. Thus the request of the Bhaṭṭācārya’s disciples is quite bona fide. Unfortunately, at the present moment it has become fashionable to present someone as an incarnation of God without referring to the śāstras. Before an intelligent person accepts someone as an incarnation of God, however, he must ask about the evidence. When the disciples of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya challenged Gopīnātha Ācārya, he immediately replied correctly: “We must hear the statements of great personalities in order to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead.” Lord Kṛṣṇa is established as the Supreme Personality of Godhead by statements from many authorized persons, such as Brahmā, Nārada, Vyāsadeva, Asita and Arjuna. Similarly, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is also established as the Supreme Personality of Godhead by evidence from the same personalities. This will be explained later.
Madhya-lila 6.81
Sourceশিষ্য কহে, — ‘ঈশ্বর-তত্ত্ব সাধি অনুমানে ।’ আচার্য কহে, — ‘অনুমানে নহে ঈশ্বরজ্ঞানে ॥ ৮১ ॥
śiṣya kahe, — ‘īśvara-tattva sādhi anumāne’ ācārya kahe, — ‘anumāne nahe īśvara-jñāne
English translation
Translation
The disciples of the Bhaṭṭācārya said, “We derive knowledge of the Absolute Truth by logical hypothesis.”
Word meanings
śiṣya kahe — the disciples said ; īśvara - tattva — the truth of the Absolute ; sādhi — derive ; anumāne — by hypothesis ; ācārya kahe — Gopīnātha Ācārya replied ; anumāne — by hypothesis ; nahe — there is not ; īśvara - jñāne — real knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead .
Purport
Gopīnātha Ācārya replied, “One cannot attain real knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead by such logical hypothesis and argument.”
The Māyāvādī philosophers in particular make certain hypotheses about the Absolute Truth. They reason that in the material world we experience that everything is created. If we trace the history of anything, we find a creator. Therefore there must be a creator of this huge cosmic manifestation. By such reasoning they come to the conclusion that a higher power has created this cosmic manifestation. The Māyāvādīs do not accept this great power to be a person. Their brains cannot accommodate the fact that the huge cosmic manifestation can be created by a person. They doubt this because as soon as they think of a person, they think of a person within the material world with limited potency. Sometimes the Māyāvādī philosophers will accept Lord Kṛṣṇa or Lord Rāma as Bhagavān, but they think of the Lord as a person having a material body. The Māyāvādīs do not understand that the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, has a spiritual body. They think of Kṛṣṇa as a great personality, a human being, within whom there is the supreme impersonal power, Brahman. Therefore they finally conclude that the impersonal Brahman is the Supreme, not the personality Kṛṣṇa. This is the basis of Māyāvādī philosophy. However, from the śāstras we can understand that the Brahman effulgence consists of the bodily rays of Kṛṣṇa:
yasya prabhā prabhavato jagad-aṇḍa-koṭi- koṭiṣv aśeṣa-vasudhādi-vibhūti-bhinnam tad brahma niṣkalam anantam aśeṣa-bhūtaṁ govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi
“I serve the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Govinda, the primeval Lord, the effulgence of whose transcendental body is known as the brahmajyoti. That brahmajyoti, which is unlimited, unfathomed and all-pervasive, is the cause of the creation of unlimited numbers of planets with varieties of climates and specific conditions of life.” ( Brahma-saṁhitā 5.40 )
Māyāvādī philosophers study the Vedic literature, but they do not understand that in the last stage of realization the Absolute Truth is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa. They do accept the fact that there is a creator of this cosmic manifestation, but that is anumāna (hypothesis). The Māyāvādī philosophers’ logic is something like seeing smoke on a hill and concluding that there is a fire. When there is a forest fire on a high hill, smoke is first of all visible. Since it is known that smoke is created when there is fire, from seeing the smoke on the hill one can conclude that a fire is burning there. Similarly, from seeing this cosmic manifestation the Māyāvādī philosophers conclude that there must be a creator.
The disciples of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya wanted evidence to show that Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was actually the creator of the cosmic manifestation. Only then would they accept Him as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the original cause of creation. Gopīnātha Ācārya replied that one could not understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead by guesswork. As Kṛṣṇa says in the Bhagavad- gītā (7.25):
nāhaṁ prakāśaḥ sarvasya yoga-māyā-samāvṛtaḥ mūḍho ’yaṁ nābhijānāti loko mām ajam avyayam
“I am never manifest to the foolish and unintelligent. For them I am covered by My eternal creative potency [ yogamāyā ]; and so the deluded world knows Me not, who am unborn and infallible.” The Supreme Personality of Godhead reserves the right of not being exposed to nondevotees. He can only be understood by bona fide devotees. Lord Kṛṣṇa says elsewhere in the Bhagavad-gītā (18.55) , bhaktyā mām abhijānāti: “One can understand Me only by the devotional process.” In the fourth chapter of the Bhagavad-gītā (4.3) Lord Kṛṣṇa says, bhakto ’si me sakhā ceti rahasyaṁ hy etad uttamam. Here Lord Kṛṣṇa informs Arjuna that He is disclosing the secrets of the Bhagavad-gītā to him because he is His devotee. Arjuna was not a sannyāsī, nor was he a Vedāntist or brāhmaṇa. He was, however, a devotee of Kṛṣṇa. The conclusion is that we have to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead from the devotees. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu Himself says, guru-kṛṣṇa-prasāde pāya bhakti-latā-bīja. (Cc. Madhya 19.151)
More evidence can be cited to show that without the mercy of a devotee or the mercy of Kṛṣṇa, one cannot understand what is Kṛṣṇa and what is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is confirmed in the next verse.
Madhya-lila 6.82
Sourceঅনুমান প্রমাণ নহে ঈশ্বরতত্ত্বজ্ঞানে । কৃপা বিনা ঈশ্বরেরে কেহ নাহি জানে ॥ ৮২ ॥
anumāna pramāṇa nahe īśvara-tattva-jñāne kṛpā vinā īśvarere keha nāhi jāne
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya continued, “One can understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead only by His mercy, not by guesswork or hypothesis.”
Word meanings
anumāna pramāṇa — evidence by hypothesis ; nahe — there is not ; īśvara - tattva - jñāne — in understanding the Absolute Truth, the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kṛpā vinā — without His mercy ; īśvarere — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; keha — anyone ; nāhi — not ; jāne — knows .
Purport
One cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead simply by exhibiting some mundane magic. Foolish people are enchanted by magical demonstrations, and when they see a few wonderful things done by mystical power, they accept a magician as the Personality of Godhead or an incarnation. This is not the way of realization. Nor should one guess or speculate about an incarnation of God or the Personality of Godhead. One has to learn from the bona fide person or from the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, as Arjuna did, by the mercy of Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa Himself also gives many hints about His potencies as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One should understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead only through the evidence presented by the śāstras and the mahājanas. In any case, one must have the mercy of the Lord in order to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead by devotional service.
Madhya-lila 6.83
Sourceঈশ্বরের কৃপা-লেশ হয় ত’ যাহারে । সেই ত’ ঈশ্বর-তত্ত্ব জানিবারে পারে ॥ ৮৩ ॥
īśvarera kṛpā-leśa haya ta’ yāhāre sei ta’ īśvara-tattva jānibāre pāre
English translation
Translation
The Ācārya continued, “If one receives but a tiny bit of the Lord’s favor by dint of devotional service, he can understand the nature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Word meanings
īśvarera — of the Personality of Godhead ; kṛpā - leśa — a little mercy ; haya — there is ; ta’ — certainly ; yāhāre — upon whom ; sei ta’ — he certainly ; īśvara - tattva — the Absolute Truth ; jānibāre — to know ; pāre — is able .
Madhya-lila 6.84
Sourceঅথাপি তে দেব পদাম্বুজদ্বয়- প্রসাদ-লেশানুগৃহীত এব হি । জানাতি তত্ত্বং ভগবন্মহিম্নো ন চান্য একোঽপি চিরং বিচিন্বন্ ॥ ৮৪ ॥
athāpi te deva padāmbuja-dvaya- prasāda-leśānugṛhīta eva hi jānāti tattvaṁ bhagavan-mahimno na cānya eko ’pi ciraṁ vicinvan
English translation
Translation
“ ‘My Lord, if one is favored by even a slight trace of the mercy of Your lotus feet, he can understand the greatness of Your personality. But those who speculate in order to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead are unable to know You, even though they continue to study the Vedas for many years.’ ”
Word meanings
atha — therefore ; api — indeed ; te — Your ; deva — my Lord ; pada - ambuja - dvaya — of the two lotus feet ; prasāda — of the mercy ; leśa — by only a trace ; anugṛhītaḥ — favored ; eva — certainly ; hi — indeed ; jānāti — one knows ; tattvam — the truth ; bhagavat — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; mahimnaḥ — of the greatness ; na — never ; ca — and ; anyaḥ — another ; ekaḥ — one ; api — although ; ciram — for a long period ; vicinvan — speculating .
Purport
The above verse is from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.14.29) . The Brahma-saṁhitā states, vedeṣu durlabham adurlabham ātma-bhaktau (Bs. 5.33). Although the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, is the ultimate goal of knowledge ( vedaiś ca sarvair aham eva vedyaḥ ), one who is not a pure devotee and who is not engaged in the service of the Lord cannot understand Him. Lord Brahmā therefore confirms this. Vedeṣu durlabham: “It is very difficult to understand the Supreme Lord simply through one’s studies.” Adurlabham ātma-bhaktau: “However, it is very easy for the devotees to capture the Lord.” The Lord is known as ajita (unconquerable). No one can conquer the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but the Lord consents to be conquered by His devotees. That is His nature. As stated in the Padma Purāṇa:
ataḥ śrī-kṛṣṇa-nāmādi na bhaved grahyam indriyaiḥ sevonmukhe hi jihvādau svayam eva sphuraty adaḥ
Being pleased by devotional activities, the Lord reveals Himself to His devotees. That is the way to understand Him.
The verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam quoted by Gopīnātha Ācārya was originally spoken by Lord Brahmā when he was defeated by Lord Kṛṣṇa. Lord Brahmā had stolen all the calves and cowherd boys in order to test Kṛṣṇa’s power. Lord Brahmā admitted that his own extraordinary powers within the universe were not in the least comparable to the unlimited powers of Lord Kṛṣṇa. If Lord Brahmā can make a mistake in understanding Kṛṣṇa, what to speak of ordinary persons, who either misunderstand Kṛṣṇa or falsely present a so-called incarnation of Kṛṣṇa for their own sense gratification.
Madhya-lila 6.85-86
Sourceযদ্যপি জগদ্গুরু তুমি — শাস্ত্র-জ্ঞানবান্ । পৃথিবীতে নাহি পণ্ডিত তোমার সমান ॥ ৮৫ ॥ ঈশ্বরের কৃপা-লেশ নাহিক তোমাতে । অতএব ঈশ্বরতত্ত্ব না পার জানিতে ॥ ৮৬ ॥
yadyapi jagad-guru tumi — śāstra-jñānavān pṛthivīte nāhi paṇḍita tomāra samāna īśvarera kṛpā-leśa nāhika tomāte ataeva īśvara-tattva nā pāra jānite
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya then addressed Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya: “You are a great scholar and a teacher of many disciples. Indeed, there is no other scholar like you on earth. Nonetheless, because you are bereft of even a pinch of the Lord’s mercy, you cannot understand Him, even though He is present in your home.
Word meanings
yadyapi — although ; jagat - guru — a teacher of many disciples ; tumi — you ; śāstra - jñānavān — well versed in Vedic knowledge ; pṛthivīte — on this earth ; nāhi — there is not ; paṇḍita — a learned scholar ; tomāra — your ; samāna — equal ; īśvarera — of the Supreme Personality of God-head ; kṛpā — of mercy ; leśa — a bit ; nāhika — there is not ; tomāte — on you ; ataeva — therefore ; īśvara - tattva — the Absolute Truth (the Supreme Personality of Godhead) ; nā pāra — are not able ; jānite — to know .
Madhya-lila 6.87
Sourceতোমার নাহিক দোষ, শাস্ত্রে এই কহে । পাণ্ডিত্যাদ্যে ঈশ্বরতত্ত্ব-জ্ঞান কভু নহে ॥’ ৮৭ ॥
tomāra nāhika doṣa, śāstre ei kahe pāṇḍityādye īśvara-tattva-jñāna kabhu nahe’
English translation
Translation
“It is not your fault; it is the verdict of the scriptures. You cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead simply by scholarship.”
Word meanings
tomāra — your ; nāhika — there is not ; doṣa — fault ; śāstre — the scriptures ; ei — this ; kahe — mention ; pāṇḍitya - ādye — simply by scholarship, etc. ; īśvara - tattva - jñāna — knowledge of the principles of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kabhu — ever ; nahe — there is not .
Purport
This is a very important verse. Even big scholars cannot understand Kṛṣṇa, yet they dare comment on the Bhagavad-gītā. Reading the Bhagavad-gītā means understanding Kṛṣṇa, yet we actually see many scholars making blunders in trying to understand Kṛṣṇa. Gopīnātha Ācārya’s statement is confirmed in many places in the Vedic literature. In the Kaṭha Upaniṣad (1.2.23) it is stated:
nāyam ātmā pravacanena labhyo na medhayā na bahunā śrutena yam evaiṣa vṛṇute tena labhyas tasyaiṣa ātmā vivṛṇute tanūṁ svām
It is also stated in Kaṭha Upaniṣad (1.2.9):
naiṣā tarkeṇa matir āpaneyā proktānyenaiva sujñānāya preṣṭha yāṁ tvam āpaḥ satya-dhṛtir batāsi tvādṛṅ no bhūyān naciketaḥ praṣṭā
The fact is that the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Supersoul, cannot be attained simply by explanations, logic and erudite scholarship. One cannot understand Him simply by one’s brain substance. Even by studying all the Vedic literatures, one cannot understand the Supreme Lord. However, if one is slightly favored by the mercy of the Lord, if the Lord is pleased, one can understand Him. But who are the candidates eligible to receive the mercy of the Lord? Only the devotees. They alone can understand what is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Lord reveals Himself to the sincere devotee when He is pleased with his service: svayam eva sphuraty adaḥ. One should not try to understand the Lord simply from the statements of the Vedas, nor should one uselessly attempt to decry these statements through reasoning and logic.
Madhya-lila 6.88
Sourceসার্বভৌম কহে, — আচার্য, কহ সাবধানে । তোমাতে ঈশ্বর-কৃপা ইথে কি প্রমাণে ॥ ৮৮ ॥
sārvabhauma kahe, — ācārya, kaha sāvadhāne tomāte īśvara-kṛpā ithe ki pramāṇe
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied, “My dear Gopīnātha Ācārya, please speak with great care. What is the proof that you have received the mercy of the Lord?”
Word meanings
sārvabhauma kahe — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya says ; ācārya — my dear Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kaha — kindly speak ; sāvadhāne — very carefully ; tomāte — unto you ; īśvara - kṛpā — mercy of the Lord ; ithe — in this matter ; ki pramāṇe — by what evidence .
Madhya-lila 6.89
Sourceআচার্য কহে, — “বস্তু-বিষয়ে হয় বস্তু-জ্ঞান । বস্তুতত্ত্ব-জ্ঞান হয় কৃপাতে প্রমাণ ॥ ৮৯ ॥
ācārya kahe, — “vastu-viṣaye haya vastu-jñāna vastu-tattva-jñāna haya kṛpāte pramāṇa
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya replied, “Knowledge of the summum bonum, the Absolute Truth, is evidence of the mercy of the Supreme Lord.”
Word meanings
ācārya kahe — Gopīnātha Ācārya replied ; vastu - viṣaye — in the matter of the summum bonum ; haya — there is ; vastu - jñāna — knowledge of the Supreme ; vastu - tattva — of the Absolute Truth ; jñāna — knowledge ; haya — is ; kṛpāte — of the mercy ; pramāṇa — the evidence .
Purport
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya informed his brother-in-law, Gopīnātha Ācārya, “The Supreme Personality of Godhead may not have shown mercy to me, but what is the proof of His having shown it to you? Kindly let us know about this.” In reply to this, Gopīnātha Ācārya said that the summum bonum, the Absolute Truth, and His different potencies are identical. Therefore one can understand the substance of the Absolute Truth by the manifestation of His different potencies. The summum bonum includes all potencies in one unit. The Absolute Truth combined with different characteristics is the original substance ( vastu ): parāsya śaktir vividhaiva śrūyate.
Thus the Vedas state that the Absolute Truth has different potencies. When one understands the characteristics of the potencies of the Absolute Truth, one is aware of the Absolute Truth. On the material platform as well, one can understand the substance by the manifestation of its symptoms. For example, when there is heat, it is to be understood that there is fire. The heat of the fire is perceived directly. The fire may not be visible, but one can search out the fire by feeling heat. Similarly, if one can perceive the characteristics of the Absolute Truth, we can know that he has understood the substance of the Absolute Truth by the mercy of the Lord.
In the Bhagavad-gītā (7.25) it is said, nāhaṁ prakāśaḥ sarvasya: the Supreme Personality of Godhead reserves the right of not being exposed to everyone. Sevonmukhe hi jihvādau svayam eva sphuraty adaḥ: “The Lord reveals Himself to a devotee when He is completely satisfied by the devotee’s service.” Thus one cannot understand the Supreme Lord without His mercy. The Absolute Truth cannot be understood by speculation, and this is the conclusion of the Bhagavad-gītā.
Madhya-lila 6.90
Sourceইঁহার শরীরে সব ঈশ্বর-লক্ষণ । মহা-প্রেমাবেশ তুমি পাঞাছ দর্শন ॥ ৯০ ॥
iṅhāra śarīre saba īśvara-lakṣaṇa mahā-premāveśa tumi pāñācha darśana
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya continued, “You have seen the symptoms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the body of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu during His absorption in an ecstatic mood.
Word meanings
iṅhāra — His ; śarīre — in the body ; saba — all ; īśvara - lakṣaṇa — characteristics of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; mahā - prema - āveśa — absorption in transcendental ecstasy ; tumi — you ; pāñācha — have obtained ; darśana — seeing .
Madhya-lila 6.91
Sourceতবু ত’ ঈশ্বর-জ্ঞান না হয় তোমার । ঈশ্বরের মায়া এই — বলি ব্যবহার ॥ ৯১ ॥
tabu ta’ īśvara-jñāna nā haya tomāra īśvarera māyā ei — bali vyavahāra
English translation
Translation
“Despite directly perceiving the symptoms of the Supreme Lord in the body of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, you cannot understand Him. This is commonly called illusion.
Word meanings
tabu ta’ — still, however ; īśvara - jñāna — knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; nā — not ; haya — there is ; tomāra — your ; īśvarera — of the Lord ; māyā — the illusion ; ei — this ; bali — saying ; vyavahāra — the general term .
Purport
Gopīnātha Ācārya is pointing out that Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya had already seen uncommon symptoms of ecstasy in the body of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
These uncommon symptoms of ecstatic love indicated the Supreme Person, but despite having seen all these symptoms, the Bhaṭṭācārya could not understand the Lord’s transcendental nature. He was considering the Lord’s pastimes to be mundane. This was certainly due to illusion.
Madhya-lila 6.92
Sourceদেখিলে না দেখে তারে বহির্মুখ জন ।” শুনি’ হাসি’ সার্বভৌম বলিল বচন ॥ ৯২ ॥
dekhile nā dekhe tāre bahirmukha jana” śuni’ hāsi’ sārvabhauma balila vacana
English translation
Translation
“A person influenced by the external energy is called bahirmukha jana, a mundane person, because despite his perception, he cannot understand the real substance.” Hearing Gopīnātha Ācārya say this, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya smiled and began to speak as follows.
Word meanings
dekhile — even after seeing ; nā — not ; dekhe — sees ; tāre — the Supreme Person ; bahiḥ - mukha jana — a person influenced by the external energy ; śuni’ — hearing this ; hāsi’ — smiling ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; balila — said ; vacana — the words .
Purport
When one’s heart is not cleansed, one cannot awaken the transcendental nature of devotional service. As Lord Kṛṣṇa confirms in the Bhagavad-gītā (7.28) :
yeṣāṁ tv anta-gataṁ pāpaṁ janānāṁ puṇya-karmaṇām te dvandva-moha-nirmuktā bhajante māṁ dṛḍha-vratāḥ
“Persons who have acted piously in previous lives and in this life and whose sinful actions are completely eradicated are freed from the dualities of delusion, and they engage themselves in My service with determination.”
When one is actually engaged in pure devotional service, it is understood that he has already attained freedom from all reactions to sinful activities. In other words, it is to be understood that devotees are already freed from sin. A sinful person, a miscreant ( duṣkṛtī ), cannot engage in devotional service. Nor can one engage in devotional service simply on the basis of scholarly speculation. One has to wait for the mercy of the Lord in order to render pure devotional service.
Madhya-lila 6.93
Sourceইষ্টগোষ্ঠী বিচার করি, না করিহ রোষ । শাস্ত্রদৃষ্ট্যে কহি, কিছু না লইহ দোষ ॥ ৯৩ ॥
iṣṭa-goṣṭhī vicāra kari, nā kariha roṣa śāstra-dṛṣṭye kahi, kichu nā la-iha doṣa
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya said, “We are just having a discussion among friends and considering the points described in the scriptures. Do not become angry. I am simply speaking on the strength of the śāstras. Please don’t take any offense.
Word meanings
iṣṭa - goṣṭhī — discussion among friends ; vicāra — consideration ; kari — we do ; nā — not ; kariha — make ; roṣa — anger ; śāstra - dṛṣṭye — according to the conclusion of scriptures ; kahi — we speak ; kichu — any ; nā — not ; la - iha — take ; doṣa — fault .
Madhya-lila 6.94
Sourceমহা-ভাগবত হয় চৈতন্য-গোসাঞি । এই কলিকালে বিষ্ণুর অবতার নাই ॥ ৯৪ ॥
mahā-bhāgavata haya caitanya-gosāñi ei kali-kāle viṣṇura avatāra nāi
English translation
Translation
“Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is certainly a great, uncommon devotee, but we cannot accept Him as an incarnation of Lord Viṣṇu because, according to śāstra, there is no incarnation in this Age of Kali.
Word meanings
mahā - bhāgavata — a great devotee ; haya — is ; caitanya - gosāñi — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ei — this ; kali - kāle — in the Age of Kali ; viṣṇura — of Lord Viṣṇu ; avatāra — incarnation ; nāi — there is not .
Madhya-lila 6.95
Sourceঅতএব ‘ত্রিযুগ’ করি’ কহি বিষ্ণুনাম । কলিযুগে অবতার নাহি, — শাস্ত্রজ্ঞান ॥ ৯৫ ॥
ataeva ‘tri-yuga’ kari’ kahi viṣṇu-nāma kali-yuge avatāra nāhī, — śāstra-jñāna
English translation
Translation
“Another name for Lord Viṣṇu is Triyuga because there is no incarnation of Lord Viṣṇu in Kali-yuga. Indeed, this is the verdict of the revealed scriptures.”
Word meanings
ataeva — therefore ; tri - yuga — the Lord, who appears in three yugas only ; kari’ — making ; kahi — we say ; viṣṇu - nāma — the holy name of Lord Viṣṇu ; kali - yuge — in the Age of Kali ; avatāra — incarnation ; nāhi — there is not ; śāstra - jñāna — the verdict of the scriptures .
Purport
The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Viṣṇu, is known as Triyuga, which means that He is manifest in three yugas. However, this means that in the Age of Kali the Lord appears not directly but in disguise. This is confirmed in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (7.9.38) :
itthaṁ nṛ-tiryag-ṛṣi-deva-jhaṣāvatārair lokān vibhāvayasi haṁsi jagat-pratīpān dharmaṁ mahā-puruṣa pāsi yugānuvṛttaṁ channaḥ kalau yad abhavas tri-yugo ’tha sa tvam
“My Lord, You kill all the enemies of the world in Your multifarious incarnations in the families of men, animals, demigods, ṛṣis, aquatics and so on. Thus You illuminate the worlds with transcendental knowledge. In the Age of Kali, O Mahāpuruṣa, You sometimes appear in a covered incarnation. Therefore You are known as Triyuga [one who appears in only three yugas ].”
Śrīla Śrīdhara Svāmī has also verified that Lord Viṣṇu appears in the Age of Kali but does not act as He does in other ages. Lord Viṣṇu incarnates for two purposes: paritrāṇāya sādhūnāṁ vināśāya ca duṣkṛtām. That is, He comes to engage in pastimes with His devotees and to annihilate the demons. These purposes are visible in the Satya, Tretā and Dvāpara yugas, but in Kali-yuga the Lord appears disguised. He does not directly kill demons and give protection to the faithful. Because the Lord is not directly perceived in Kali-yuga but is directly known in the other three yugas, His name is Triyuga.
Madhya-lila 6.96
Sourceশুনিয়া আচার্য কহে দুঃখী হঞা মনে । শাস্ত্রজ্ঞ করিঞা তুমি কর অভিমানে ॥ ৯৬ ॥
śuniyā ācārya kahe duḥkhī hañā mane śāstra-jña kariñā tumi kara abhimāne
English translation
Translation
Upon hearing this, Gopīnātha Ācārya became very unhappy. He said to the Bhaṭṭācārya, “You consider yourself the knower of all Vedic scriptures.
Word meanings
śuniyā — hearing this ; ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kahe — says ; duḥkhī — unhappy ; hañā — becoming ; mane — in the mind ; śāstra - jña — well versed in Vedic scriptures ; kariñā — taking as ; tumi — you ; kara — do ; abhimāne — pride .
Madhya-lila 6.97
Sourceভাগবত-ভারত দুই শাস্ত্রের প্রধান । সেই দুইগ্রন্থ-বাক্যে নাহি অবধান ॥ ৯৭ ॥
bhāgavata-bhārata dui śāstrera pradhāna sei dui-grantha-vākye nāhi avadhāna
English translation
Translation
“Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam and the Mahābhārata are the two most important Vedic scriptures, but you have paid no attention to their statements.
Word meanings
bhāgavata — Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam ; bhārata — Mahābhārata ; dui — two ; śāstrera — of all Vedic scriptures ; pradhāna — the most prominent ; sei — those ; dui - grantha — of the two scriptures ; vākye — in the statements ; nāhi — there is not ; avadhāna — attention .
Madhya-lila 6.98
Sourceসেই দুই কহে কলিতে সাক্ষাৎ-অবতার । তুমি কহ, — কলিতে নাহি বিষ্ণুর প্রচার ॥ ৯৮ ॥
sei dui kahe kalite sākṣāt-avatāra tumi kaha, — kalite nāhi viṣṇura pracāra
English translation
Translation
“In Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam and the Mahābhārata it is stated that the Lord appears directly, but you say that in this age there is no manifestation or incarnation of Lord Viṣṇu.
Word meanings
sei — those ; dui — two ; kahe — say ; kalite — in this Age of Kali ; sākṣāt — direct ; avatāra — incarnation ; tumi — you ; kaha — say ; kalite — in this Age of Kali ; nāhi — there is not ; viṣṇura — of Lord Viṣṇu ; pracāra — manifestation .
Madhya-lila 6.99
Sourceকলিযুগে লীলাবতার না করে ভগবান্ । অতএব ‘ত্রিযুগ’ করি’ কহি তার নাম ॥ ৯৯ ॥
kali-yuge līlāvatāra nā kare bhagavān ataeva ‘tri-yuga’ kari’ kahi tāra nāma
English translation
Translation
“In this Age of Kali there is no līlā-avatāra of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; therefore He is known as Triyuga. That is one of His holy names.”
Word meanings
kali - yuge — in this Age of Kali ; līlā - avatāra — a pastime incarnation ; nā — not ; kare — does ; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; ataeva — therefore ; tri - yuga — Triyuga (manifested in three yugas ) ; kari’ — accepting ; kahi — I say ; tāra nāma — His holy name .
Purport
A līlā-avatāra is an incarnation of the Lord who performs a variety of activities without making any special endeavor. He always has one pastime after another, all full of transcendental pleasure, and these pastimes are fully controlled by the Supreme Person. The Supreme Person is totally independent of all others in these pastimes. While teaching Sanātana Gosvāmī (Cc. Madhya 20.296-298), Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu pointed out that one cannot count the number of līlā-avatāras:
līlāvatāra kṛṣṇera nā yāya gaṇana pradhāna kariyā kahi dig-daraśana
“However,” the Lord told Sanātana, “I shall explain the chief līlā-avatāras. ”
matsya, kūrma, raghunātha, nṛsiṁha, vāmana varāhādi — lekhā yāṅra nā yāya gaṇana
Thus the Lord’s incarnations were enumerated, including Matsya, the fish incarnation; Kūrma, the tortoise; Lord Rāmacandra; Nṛsiṁhadeva; Vāmanadeva; and Varāha, the boar incarnation. Thus there are innumerable līlā-avatāras, and all of these exhibit wonderful pastimes. Lord Varāha, the boar incarnation, lifted the entire planet earth from the depths of the Garbhodaka Ocean. The tortoise incarnation, Lord Kūrma, became a pivot for the emulsification of the whole sea, and Lord Nṛsiṁhadeva appeared as half-man, half-lion. These are some of the wonderful and uncommon features of līlā-avatāras.
In his book Laghu-bhāgavatāmṛta, Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī has enumerated the following twenty-five līlā-avatāras: Catuḥ-sana, Nārada, Varāha, Matsya, Yajña, Nara-Nārāyaṇa, Kapila, Dattātreya, Hayaśīrṣa (Hayagrīva), Haṁsa, Pṛśnigarbha, Ṛṣabha, Pṛthu, Nṛsiṁha, Kūrma, Dhanvantari, Mohinī, Vāmana, Paraśurāma, Rāghavendra, Vyāsa, Balarāma, Kṛṣṇa, Buddha and Kalki.
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is not mentioned as a līlā-avatāra because He is an incarnation in disguise ( channa-avatāra ) . In this Age of Kali there are no līlā-avatāras, but there is an incarnation of the Lord manifested in the body of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. This has been explained in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam.
Madhya-lila 6.100
Sourceপ্রতিযুগে করেন কৃষ্ণ যুগ-অবতার । তর্কনিষ্ঠ হৃদয় তোমার নাহিক বিচার ॥ ১০০ ॥
pratiyuge karena kṛṣṇa yuga-avatāra tarka-niṣṭha hṛdaya tomāra nāhika vicāra
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya continued, “There is certainly an incarnation in every age, and such an incarnation is called the yuga-avatāra. But your heart has become so hardened by logic and argument that you cannot consider all these facts.
Word meanings
prati - yuge — in every age or millennium ; karena — makes ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; yuga - avatāra — incarnation for the age ; tarka - niṣṭha — hardened by argument ; hṛdaya — heart ; tomāra — your ; nāhika — there is not ; vicāra — consideration .
Madhya-lila 6.101
Sourceআসন্ বর্ণাস্ত্রয়ো হ্যস্য গৃহ্ণতোঽনুযুগং তনূঃ । শুক্লো রক্তস্তথা পীত ইদানীং কৃষ্ণতাং গতঃ ॥ ১০১ ॥
āsan varṇās trayo hy asya gṛhṇato ’nu-yugaṁ tanūḥ śuklo raktas tathā pīta idānīṁ kṛṣṇatāṁ gataḥ
English translation
Translation
“ ‘In the past, your son has had bodies of three different colors, according to the age. These colors were white, red and yellow. In this age [Dvāpara-yuga] He has accepted a blackish body.’
Word meanings
āsan — there were ; varṇāḥ — colors ; trayaḥ — three ; hi — indeed ; asya — of Him ; gṛhṇataḥ — accepting ; anu - yugam — according to the age ; tanūḥ — bodies ; śuklaḥ — white ; raktaḥ — red ; tathā — also ; pītaḥ — yellow ; idānīm — at the present moment ; kṛṣṇatām — blackish ; gataḥ — has accepted .
Purport
This verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.8.13) was spoken by Garga Muni when he was performing the rituals at Lord Kṛṣṇa’s name-giving ceremony. He states that the incarnations of the Lord in other ages had been white, red and yellow. This yellow color refers to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, whose bodily complexion was yellowish. This confirms that in past Kali-yugas the Lord also had incarnated in a body that was yellow in hue. It is understood that the Lord incarnates in different colors for the different yugas (Satya, Tretā, Dvāpara and Kali). Accepting the color yellow ( pīta ), as well as other characteristics, the Lord incarnated as Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. This is the verdict of all Vedic authorities.
Madhya-lila 6.102
Sourceইতি দ্বাপর উর্বীশ স্তুবন্তি জগদীশ্বরম্ । নানাতন্ত্রবিধানেন কলাবপি তথা শৃণু ॥ ১০২ ॥
iti dvāpara urv-īśa stuvanti jagad-īśvaram nānā-tantra-vidhānena kalāv api tathā śṛṇu
English translation
Translation
“ ‘In the Age of Kali, as well as in Dvāpara-yuga, the people offer prayers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead by various mantras and observe the regulative principles of the supplementary Vedic literatures. Now please hear of this from me.
Word meanings
iti — thus ; dvāpare — in Dvāpara-yuga ; uru - īśa — O King ; stuvanti — offer prayers ; jagat - īśvaram — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; nānā — various ; tantra — of the supplementary Vedic literatures ; vidhānena — by regulative principles ; kalau — in the Age of Kali ; api — certainly ; tathā — so also ; śṛṇu — hear .
Purport
This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (11.5.31) .
Madhya-lila 6.103
Sourceকৃষ্ণবর্ণং ত্বিষাঽকৃষ্ণং সাঙ্গোপাঙ্গাস্ত্রপার্ষদম্ । যজ্ঞৈঃ সংকীর্তনপ্রায়ৈর্যজন্তি হি সুমেধসঃ ॥ ১০৩ ॥
kṛṣṇa-varṇaṁ tviṣākṛṣṇaṁ sāṅgopāṅgāstra-pārṣadam yajñaiḥ saṅkīrtana-prāyair yajanti hi su-medhasaḥ
English translation
Translation
“ ‘In this Age of Kali, those who are intelligent perform the congregational chanting of the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra, worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who appears in this age always describing the glories of Kṛṣṇa. That incarnation is yellowish in hue and is always associated with His plenary expansions [such as Śrī Nityānanda Prabhu] and personal expansions [such as Gadādhara], as well as His devotees and associates [such as Svarūpa Dāmodara].’
Word meanings
kṛṣṇa - varṇam — chanting the two syllables kṛṣ and ṇa ; tviṣā — by complexion ; akṛṣṇam — not blackish ; sa - aṅga — accompanied by personal expansions ; upa - aṅga — devotees ; astra — the weapon of chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra ; pārṣadam — and associates like Gadādhara, Svarūpa Dāmodara, etc. ; yajñaiḥ — by sacrifice ; saṅkīrtana — congregational chanting of the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra ; prāyaiḥ — chiefly consisting of ; yajanti — worship ; hi — indeed ; su - medhasaḥ — those who are intelligent .
Purport
This verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (11.5.32) is explained by Śrī Jīva Gosvāmī in his Krama-sandarbha, as quoted by Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura in regard to the explanation of Ādi-līlā, third chapter, verse 52.
Madhya-lila 6.104
Sourceসুবর্ণবর্ণো হেমাঙ্গো বরাঙ্গশ্চন্দনাঙ্গদী । সন্ন্যাসকৃচ্ছমঃ শান্তো নিষ্ঠা-শান্তি-পরায়ণঃ ॥ ১০৪ ॥
suvarṇa-varṇo hemāṅgo varāṅgaś candanāṅgadī sannyāsa-kṛc chamaḥ śānto niṣṭhā-śānti-parāyaṇaḥ
English translation
Translation
“ ‘The Lord [in the incarnation of Gaurasundara] has a golden complexion. Indeed, His entire body, which is very nicely constituted, is like molten gold. Sandalwood pulp is smeared all over His body. He will take the fourth order of spiritual life [sannyāsa] and will be very much self-controlled. He will be distinguished from Māyāvādī sannyāsīs in that He will be fixed in devotional service and will spread the saṅkīrtana movement.’ ”
Word meanings
suvarṇa - varṇaḥ — whose complexion is like gold ; hema - aṅgaḥ — having a body like molten gold ; vara - aṅgaḥ — whose body is very beautifully constructed ; candana - aṅgadī — smeared with the pulp of sandalwood ; sannyāsa - kṛt — accepting the renounced order of life ; śamaḥ — self-controlled ; śāntaḥ — peaceful ; niṣṭhā — firmly fixed ; śānti — bringing peace by propagating the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra ; parāyaṇaḥ — always in the ecstatic mood of devotional service .
Purport
Gopīnātha Ācārya quoted this verse from the Mahābhārata’s Viṣṇu-sahasra-nāma-stotra .
Madhya-lila 6.105
Sourceতোমার আগে এত কথার নাহি প্রয়োজন । ঊষর-ভূমিতে যেন বীজের রোপণ ॥ ১০৫ ॥
tomāra āge eta kathāra nāhi prayojana ūṣara-bhūmite yena bījera ropaṇa
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya then said, “There is no need to quote so much evidence from the śāstras, for you are a very dry speculator. There is no need to sow seeds in barren land.
Word meanings
tomāra āge — before you ; eta — so many ; kathāra — of words ; nāhi — there is not ; prayojana — necessity ; ūṣara - bhūmite — in barren land ; yena — like ; bījera — of the seed ; ropaṇa — sowing .
Madhya-lila 6.106
Sourceতোমার উপরে তাঁর কৃপা যবে হবে । এসব সিদ্ধান্ত তবে তুমিহ কহিবে ॥ ১০৬ ॥
tomāra upare tāṅra kṛpā yabe habe e-saba siddhānta tabe tumiha kahibe
English translation
Translation
“When the Lord will be pleased with you, you will also understand these conclusions and will quote from the śāstras.
Word meanings
tomāra upare — upon you ; tāṅra — the Lord’s ; kṛpā — mercy ; yabe — when ; habe — there will be ; e - saba — all these ; siddhānta — conclusions ; tabe — at that time ; tumiha — you also ; kahibe — will quote .
Madhya-lila 6.107
Sourceতোমার যে শিষ্য কহে কুতর্ক, নানাবাদ । ইহার কি দোষ — এই মায়ার প্রসাদ ॥ ১০৭ ॥
tomāra ye śiṣya kahe kutarka, nānā-vāda ihāra ki doṣa — ei māyāra prasāda
English translation
Translation
“The false arguments and philosophical word jugglery of your disciples are not faults of theirs. They have simply received the benediction of Māyāvāda philosophy.
Word meanings
tomāra — your ; ye — which ; śiṣya — disciples ; kahe — say ; ku - tarka — false arguments ; nānā - vāda — jugglery of philosophy ; ihāra — their ; ki — what ; doṣa — fault ; ei — this ; māyāra — of illusion ; prasāda — benediction .
Madhya-lila 6.108
Sourceযচ্ছক্তয়ো বদতাং বাদিনাং বৈ, বিবাদ-সংবাদ-ভুবো ভবন্তি । কুর্বন্তি চৈষাং মুহুরাত্মমোহং, তস্মৈ নমোঽনন্তগুণায় ভূম্নে ॥ ১০৮ ॥
yac-chaktayo vadatāṁ vādināṁ vai vivāda-saṁvāda-bhuvo bhavanti kurvanti caiṣāṁ muhur ātma-mohaṁ tasmai namo ’nanta-guṇāya bhūmne
English translation
Translation
“ ‘I offer my respectful obeisances unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is full of unlimited qualities and whose different potencies bring about agreement and disagreement between disputants. Thus the illusory energy again and again covers the self-realization of both disputants.’
Word meanings
yat — whose ; śaktayaḥ — potencies ; vadatām — contending ; vādinām — of the opposing disputants ; vai — indeed ; vivāda — of opposition ; saṁvāda — of agreement ; bhuvaḥ — objects ; bhavanti — become ; kurvanti — do ; ca — also ; eṣām — of them ; muhuḥ — always ; ātma - moham — illusion of the self ; tasmai — unto Him ; namaḥ — obeisances ; ananta — unlimited ; guṇāya — who has qualities ; bhūmne — the Supreme .
Purport
This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (6.4.31) .
Madhya-lila 6.109
Sourceযুক্তং সন্তি সর্বত্র ভাষন্তে ব্রাহ্মণা যথা । মায়াং মদীয়ামুদ্গৃহ্য বদতাং কিং নু দুর্ঘটম্ ॥ ১০৯ ॥
yuktaṁ ca santi sarvatra bhāṣante brāhmaṇā yathā māyāṁ madīyām udgṛhya vadatāṁ kiṁ nu durghaṭam
English translation
Translation
“ ‘In almost all cases, whatever learned brāhmaṇas speak becomes accepted; nothing is impossible for one who takes shelter of My illusory energy and speaks under her influence.’ ”
Word meanings
yuktam — quite befitting ; ca — also ; santi — are ; sarvatra — everywhere ; bhāṣante — speak ; brāhmaṇāḥ — the learned ; yathā — as much ; māyām — illusion ; madīyām — of Me ; udgṛhya — accepting ; vadatām — of the speculators ; kim — what ; nu — certainly ; durghaṭam — impossible .
Purport
In this verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (11.22.4) , the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains that His illusory energy can perform the impossible; such is the power of the illusory energy. In many cases philosophical speculators have covered the real truth and have boldly set forth false theories. In ancient times philosophers like Kapila, Gautama, Jaimini, Kaṇāda and similar brāhmaṇas propounded useless philosophical theories, and in modern days so-called scientists are setting forth many false theories about the creation, backed up by seemingly logical arguments. This is all due to the influence of the Supreme Lord’s illusory energy. The illusory energy, therefore, sometimes appears correct because it is emanating from the Supreme Correct. To avoid the very bewildering illusory influence, one must accept the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead as they are. Only then can one escape the influence of the illusory energy.
Madhya-lila 6.110
Sourceতবে ভট্টাচার্য কহে, যাহ গোসাঞির স্থানে । আমার নামে গণ-সহিত কর নিমন্ত্রণে ॥ ১১০ ॥
tabe bhaṭṭācārya kahe, yāha gosāñira sthāne āmāra nāme gaṇa-sahita kara nimantraṇe
English translation
Translation
After hearing this from Gopīnātha Ācārya, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said, “First go to the place where Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is staying and invite Him here with His associates. Ask Him on my account.
Word meanings
tabe — thereafter ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kahe — says ; yāha — please go ; gosāñira sthane — to the place of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āmāra nāme — in my name ; gaṇa - sahita — with His associates ; kara — make ; nimantraṇe — invitation .
Madhya-lila 6.111
Sourceপ্রসাদ আনি’ তাঁরে করাহ আগে ভিক্ষা । পশ্চাৎ আসি’ আমারে করাইহ শিক্ষা ॥ ১১১ ॥
prasāda āni’ tāṅre karāha āge bhikṣā paścāt āsi’ āmāre karāiha śikṣā
English translation
Translation
“Take jagannātha-prasādam and first give it to Caitanya Mahāprabhu and His associates. After that, come back here and teach me well.”
Word meanings
prasāda āni’ — bringing jagannātha-prasādam ; tāṅre — unto Him ; karāha — make ; āge — first ; bhikṣā — acceptance ; paścāt — afterwards ; āsi’ — coming here ; āmāre — unto me ; karāiha — cause ; śikṣā — teaching .
Madhya-lila 6.112
Sourceআচার্য — ভগিনীপতি, শ্যালক — ভট্টাচার্য । নিন্দা-স্তুতি-হাস্যে শিক্ষা করা’ন আচার্য ॥ ১১২ ॥
ācārya — bhaginī-pati, śyālaka — bhaṭṭācārya nindā-stuti-hāsye śikṣā karā’na ācārya
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya was the brother-in-law of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya; therefore their relationship was very sweet and intimate. Under the circumstances, Gopīnātha Ācārya taught him by sometimes blaspheming him, sometimes praising him and sometimes laughing at him. This had been going on for some time.
Word meanings
ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; bhaginī - pati — sister’s husband ; śyālaka — wife’s brother ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; nindā — sometimes blaspheming ; stuti — sometimes by praising ; hāsye — sometimes by laughing ; śikṣā — instruction ; karā’na — causes ; ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya .
Madhya-lila 6.113
Sourceআচার্যের সিদ্ধান্তে মুকুন্দের হৈল সন্তোষ । ভট্টাচার্যের বাক্যে মনে হৈল দুঃখ-রোষ ॥ ১১৩ ॥
ācāryera siddhānte mukundera haila santoṣa bhaṭṭācāryera vākya mane haila duḥkha-roṣa
English translation
Translation
Śrīla Mukunda Datta felt very satisfied to hear the conclusive statements of Gopīnātha Ācārya, but he became very unhappy and angry to hear the statements put forward by Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
ācāryera — of Gopīnātha Ācārya ; siddhānte — with the conclusions ; mukundera — of Mukunda Datta ; haila — there was ; santoṣa — satisfaction ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; vākye — by the words ; mane — in the mind ; haila — there was ; duḥkha — unhappiness ; roṣa — and anger .
Madhya-lila 6.114
Sourceগোসাঞির স্থানে আচার্য কৈল আগমন । ভট্টাচার্যের নামে তাঁরে কৈল নিমন্ত্রণ ॥ ১১৪ ॥
gosāñira sthāne ācārya kaila āgamana bhaṭṭācāryera nāme tāṅre kaila nimantraṇa
English translation
Translation
According to the instructions of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, Gopīnātha Ācārya went to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and invited Him on the Bhaṭṭācārya’s behalf.
Word meanings
gosāñira sthāne — to the place where Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was staying ; ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kaila — did ; āgamana — coming ; bhaṭṭācāryera nāme — on behalf of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; tāṅre — unto Him ; kaila — made ; nimantraṇa — invitation .
Madhya-lila 6.115
Sourceমুকুন্দ-সহিত কহে ভট্টাচার্যের কথা । ভট্টাচার্যের নিন্দা করে, মনে পাঞা ব্যথা ॥ ১১৫ ॥
mukunda-sahita kahe bhaṭṭācāryera kathā bhaṭṭācāryera nindā kare, mane pāñā vyathā
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya’s statements were discussed before Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Gopīnātha Ācārya and Mukunda Datta disapproved of the Bhaṭṭācārya’s statements because they caused mental pain.
Word meanings
mukunda - sahita — along with Mukunda ; kahe — describes ; bhaṭṭācāryera kathā — all the words of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; nindā — defamation ; kare — does ; mane — in the mind ; pāñā — getting ; vyathā — some pain .
Madhya-lila 6.116
Sourceশুনি মহাপ্রভু কহে ঐছে মৎ কহ । আমা প্রতি ভট্টাচার্যের হয় অনুগ্রহ ॥ ১১৬ ॥
śuni mahāprabhu kahe aiche mat kaha āmā prati bhaṭṭācāryera haya anugraha
English translation
Translation
Hearing this, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “Do not speak like that. Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya has shown great affection and mercy toward Me.
Word meanings
śuni — hearing them ; mahāprabhu — Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kahe — says ; aiche — such ; mat kaha — do not speak ; āmā prati — toward Me ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; haya — there is ; anugraha — mercy .
Madhya-lila 6.117
Sourceআমার সন্ন্যাস-ধর্ম চাহেন রাখিতে । বাৎসল্যে করুণা করেন, কি দোষ ইহাতে ॥ ১১৭ ॥
āmāra sannyāsa-dharma cāhena rākhite vātsalye karuṇā karena, ki doṣa ihāte
English translation
Translation
“Out of paternal affection for Me, he wants to protect Me and see that I follow the regulative principles of a sannyāsī. What fault is there in this?”
Word meanings
āmāra — My ; sannyāsa - dharma — regulative principles of sannyāsa ; cāhena — he wants ; rākhite — to keep ; vātsalye — out of paternal affection ; karuṇā — mercy ; karena — does ; ki — what ; doṣa — fault ; ihāte — in this connection .
Madhya-lila 6.118
Sourceআর দিন মহাপ্ৰভু ভট্টাচার্য-সনে । আনন্দে করিলা জগন্নাথ দরশনে ॥ ১১৮ ॥
āra dina mahāprabhu bhaṭṭācārya-sane ānande karilā jagannātha daraśane
English translation
Translation
The next morning, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya together visited the temple of Lord Jagannātha. Both of them were in a very pleasant mood.
Word meanings
āra dina — the next day ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bhaṭṭācārya - sane — along with Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; ānande — in great pleasure ; karilā — did ; jagannātha — to Lord Jagannātha ; daraśane — visit .
Madhya-lila 6.119
Sourceভট্টাচার্য-সঙ্গে তাঁর মন্দিরে আইলা । প্রভুরে আসন দিয়া আপনে বসিলা ॥ ১১৯ ॥
bhaṭṭācārya-saṅge tāṅra mandire āilā prabhure āsana diyā āpane vasilā
English translation
Translation
When they entered the temple, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya offered Caitanya Mahāprabhu a seat, while he himself sat down on the floor out of due respect for a sannyāsī.
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya - saṅge — along with Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; tāṅra — His (Lord Jagannātha’s) ; mandire — to the temple ; āilā — came ; prabhure — unto Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āsana — sitting place ; diyā — giving ; āpane — personally ; vasilā — sat down .
Madhya-lila 6.120
Sourceবেদান্ত পড়াইতে তবে আরম্ভ করিলা । স্নেহ-ভক্তি করি’ কিছু প্রভুরে কহিলা ॥ ১২০ ॥
vedānta paḍāite tabe ārambha karilā sneha-bhakti kari’ kichu prabhure kahilā
English translation
Translation
He then began to instruct Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu on Vedānta philosophy, and out of affection and devotion, he spoke to the Lord as follows.
Word meanings
vedānta — Vedānta philosophy ; paḍāite — to instruct ; tabe — then ; ārambha — beginning ; karilā — made ; sneha — affection ; bhakti — and devotion ; kari’ — showing ; kichu — something ; prabhure — unto the Lord ; kahilā — said .
Purport
The Vedānta- or Brahma-sūtra, written by Śrīla Vyāsadeva, is a book studied by all advanced spiritual students, especially by the sannyāsīs of all religious communities ( sampradāyas ) . The sannyāsīs must read the Vedānta-sūtra to establish their final conclusions concerning Vedic knowledge. Here, of course, the Vedānta mentioned is the commentary of Śaṅkarācārya, known as Śārīraka-bhāṣya. Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya intended to convert Caitanya Mahāprabhu, who was a Vaiṣṇava sannyāsī, into a Māyāvādī sannyāsī. He therefore made this arrangement to instruct Him in the Vedānta-sūtra according to the Śārīraka commentary of Śaṅkarācārya. All the sannyāsīs of the Śaṅkara-sampradāya enjoy seriously studying the Vedānta-sūtra with the Śārīraka-bhāṣya commentary. It is said, vedānta-vākyeṣu sadā ramantaḥ: “One should always enjoy the studies of the Vedānta-sūtra. ”
Madhya-lila 6.121
Sourceবেদান্ত-শ্রবণ, — এই সন্ন্যাসীর ধর্ম । নিরন্তর কর তুমি বেদান্ত শ্রবণ ॥ ১২১ ॥
vedānta-śravaṇa, — ei sannyāsīra dharma nirantara kara tumi vedānta śravaṇa
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya said, “Hearing Vedānta philosophy is a sannyāsī’s main business. Therefore without hesitation You should study Vedānta philosophy, hearing it without cessation from a superior person.”
Word meanings
vedānta - śravaṇa — hearing of Vedānta philosophy ; ei — this ; sannyāsīra — of a person in the renounced order ; dharma — factual occupation ; nirantara — incessantly ; kara — do ; tumi — You ; vedānta — of Vedānta philosophy ; śravaṇa — hearing .
Madhya-lila 6.122
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, — ‘মোরে তুমি কর অনুগ্রহ । সেই সে কর্তব্য, তুমি যেই মোরে কহ ॥’ ১২২ ॥
prabhu kahe, — ‘more tumi kara anugraha sei se kartavya, tumi yei more kaha’
English translation
Translation
Lord Caitanya replied, “You are very merciful to Me, and therefore I think it is My duty to obey your order.”
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord replied ; more — unto Me ; tumi — you ; kara — show ; anugraha — mercy ; sei se — that ; kartavya — duty ; tumi — you ; yei — whatever ; more — unto Me ; kaha — say .
Madhya-lila 6.123
Sourceসাত দিন পর্যন্ত ঐছে করেন শ্রবণে । ভাল-মন্দ নাহি কহে, বসি’ মাত্র শুনে ॥ ১২৩ ॥
sāta dina paryanta aiche karena śravaṇe bhāla-manda nāhi kahe, vasi’ mātra śune
English translation
Translation
Thus for seven days continually, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu listened to the Vedānta philosophy expounded by Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya. However, Caitanya Mahāprabhu did not say anything and did not indicate whether it was right or wrong. He simply sat there and listened to the Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
sāta dina — seven days ; paryanta — up to ; aiche — in this way ; karena — does ; śravaṇe — hearing ; bhāla — right ; manda — wrong ; nāhi — not ; kahe — says ; vasi’ — sitting ; mātra — only ; śune — hears .
Madhya-lila 6.124
Sourceঅষ্টম-দিবসে তাঁরে পুছে সার্বভৌম । সাতদিন কর তুমি বেদান্ত শ্রবণ ॥ ১২৪ ॥
aṣṭama-divase tāṅre puche sārvabhauma sāta dina kara tumi vedānta śravaṇa
English translation
Translation
On the eighth day, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said to Caitanya Mahāprabhu, “You have been listening to Vedānta philosophy from me continually for seven days.
Word meanings
aṣṭama - divase — on the eighth day ; tāṅre — unto Him ; puche — inquires ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; sāta dina — seven days ; kara — do ; tumi — You ; vedānta — Vedānta philosophy ; śravaṇa — hearing .
Madhya-lila 6.125
Sourceভালমন্দ নাহি কহ, রহ মৌন ধরি’ । বুঝ, কি না বুঝ, — ইহা বুঝিতে না পারি ॥ ১২৫ ॥
bhāla-manda nāhi kaha, raha mauna dhari’ bujha, ki nā bujha, — ihā bujhite nā pāri
English translation
Translation
“You have simply been listening, fixed in Your silence. Since You do not say whether You think it is right or wrong, I cannot know whether You are actually understanding Vedānta philosophy or not.”
Word meanings
bhāla - manda — right or wrong ; nāhi kaha — not speak ; raha — keep ; mauna — silence ; dhari’ — holding ; bujha — understand ; ki — or ; nā — not ; bujha — understand ; ihā — this ; bujhite — to understand ; nā — not ; pāri — I am able .
Madhya-lila 6.126
Sourceপ্রভু কহে — “মূর্খ আমি, নাহি অধ্যয়ন । তোমার আজ্ঞাতে মাত্র করিয়ে শ্রবণ ॥ ১২৬ ॥
prabhu kahe — “mūrkha āmi, nāhi adhyayana tomāra ājñāte mātra kariye śravaṇa
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied, “I am a fool, and consequently I do not study the Vedānta-sūtra. I am just trying to hear it from you because you have ordered Me.
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord replied ; mūrkha āmi — I am a fool ; nāhi — there is not ; adhyayana — study ; tomāra — your ; ājñāte — by the order ; mātra — only ; kariye — I do ; śravaṇa — hearing .
Madhya-lila 6.127
Sourceসন্ন্যাসীর ধর্ম লাগি’ শ্রবণ মাত্র করি । তুমি যেই অর্থ কর, বুঝিতে না পারি ॥” ১২৭ ॥
sannyāsīra dharma lāgi’ śravaṇa mātra kari tumi yei artha kara, bujhite nā pāri”
English translation
Translation
“Only for the sake of executing the duties of the renounced order of sannyāsa do I listen. Unfortunately, I cannot in the least understand the meaning you are presenting.”
Word meanings
sannyāsīra — of one in the renounced order of life ; dharma — the occupation ; lāgi’ — for the matter of ; śravaṇa — hearing ; mātra — only ; kari — I do ; tumi — you ; yei — whatever ; artha — meaning ; kara — present ; bujhite — to understand ; nā — not ; pāri — I am able .
Purport
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu presented Himself as if He were a sannyāsī in name only or, in other words, a number-one fool. Māyāvādī sannyāsīs in India are very much accustomed to declaring themselves jagad-gurus, teachers of the world, although they have no information of the outside world and are limited in their experience to a small town or village, or perhaps to the country of India. Nor do such sannyāsīs have sufficient education. Unfortunately, at the present moment there are many foolish sannyāsīs, both in India and elsewhere, who simply read and study Vedic literature without understanding the purports. When Caitanya Mahāprabhu was having His discussion with the Chand Kazi, the Muslim magistrate of Navadvīpa, He recited a verse from the Vedic literature to the effect that the order of sannyāsa is prohibited in this Age of Kali. Only those who are very serious and who follow the regulative principles and study Vedic literature should accept sannyāsa. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu approved of a sannyāsī’s reading the Vedānta-sūtra, or Brahma-sūtra, but He did not approve the Śārīraka commentary of Śaṅkarācārya. Indeed, He said elsewhere, māyāvādi-bhāṣya śunile haya sarva-nāśa: “If one hears the Śārīraka-bhāṣya of Śaṅkarācārya, he is doomed.” Thus a sannyāsī, a transcendentalist, must read the Vedānta-sūtra regularly, but he should not read the Śārīraka-bhāṣya. This is the conclusion of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. The real commentary on the Vedānta-sūtra is Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. Artho ’yaṁ brahma-sūtrānām: Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is the original commentary on the Vedānta-sūtra, written by the author himself, Śrīla Vyāsadeva.
Madhya-lila 6.128
Sourceভট্টাচার্য কহে, — না বুঝি’, হেন জ্ঞান যার । বুঝিবার লাগি’ সেহ পুছে পুনর্বার ॥ ১২৮ ॥
bhaṭṭācārya kahe, — nā bujhi’, hena jñāna yāra bujhibāra lāgi’ seha puche punarbāra
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied, “I accept that You do not understand, yet even one who does not understand inquires about the subject matter.
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya kahe — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied ; nā bujhi’ — not understanding ; hena — this ; jñāna — the knowledge ; yāra — of someone ; bujhibāra lāgi’ — just to understand ; seha — he also ; puche — inquires ; punaḥ - bāra — again .
Madhya-lila 6.129
Sourceতুমি শুনি’ শুনি’ রহ মৌন মাত্র ধরি’ । হৃদয়ে কি আছে তোমার, বুঝিতে না পারি ॥ ১২৯ ॥
tumi śuni’ śuni’ raha mauna mātra dhari’ hṛdaye ki āche tomāra, bujhite nā pāri
English translation
Translation
“You are hearing again and again, yet You keep silent. I cannot understand what is actually within Your mind.”
Word meanings
tumi — You ; śuni’ — hearing ; śuni’ — hearing ; raha — keep ; mauna — silence ; mātra — only ; dhari’ — holding ; hṛdaye — in the heart ; ki — what ; āche — there is ; tomāra — Your ; bujhite — to understand ; nā — not ; pāri — am able .
Madhya-lila 6.130
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, — “সূত্রের অর্থ বুঝিয়ে নির্মল । তোমার ব্যাখ্যা শুনি’ মন হয় ত’ বিকল ॥ ১৩০ ॥
prabhu kahe, — “sūtrera artha bujhiye nirmala tomāra vyākhyā śuni’ mana haya ta’ vikala
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu then revealed His mind, saying, “I can understand the meaning of each sūtra very clearly, but your explanations have simply agitated My mind.
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord replied ; sūtrera artha — the meaning of the sūtras ; bujhiye — I can understand ; nirmala — very clearly ; tomāra — your ; vyākhyā — explanation ; śuni’ — hearing ; mana — mind ; haya — becomes ; ta’ — indeed ; vikala — disturbed .
Purport
The factual meaning of the aphorisms of the Vedānta-sūtra is as clear as sunshine. The Māyāvādī philosophers simply try to cover the sunshine with the clouds of interpretations imagined by Śaṅkarācārya and his followers.
Madhya-lila 6.131
Sourceসূত্রের অর্থ ভাষ্য কহে প্রকাশিয়া । তুমি, ভাষ্য কহ — সূত্রের অর্থ আচ্ছাদিয়া ॥ ১৩১ ॥
sūtrera artha bhāṣya kahe prakāśiyā tumi, bhāṣya kaha — sūtrera artha ācchādiyā
English translation
Translation
“The meaning of the aphorisms in the Vedānta-sūtra contain clear purports in themselves, but other purports you presented simply covered the meaning of the sūtras like a cloud.
Word meanings
sūtrera artha — meanings of the sūtras ; bhāṣya — the purport ; kahe — one speaks ; prakāśiyā — clearly manifesting ; tumi — you ; bhāṣya kaha — make a comment ; sūtrera — of the sūtras ; artha — the meanings ; ācchādiyā — covering .
Purport
Please refer to Ādi-līlā, seventh chapter, verses 106-146, for an explanation of this verse.
Madhya-lila 6.132
Sourceসূত্রের মুখ্য অর্থ না করহ ব্যাখ্যান । কল্পনার্থে তুমি তাহা কর আচ্ছাদন ॥ ১৩২ ॥
sūtrera mukhya artha nā karaha vyākhyāna kalpanārthe tumi tāhā kara ācchādana
English translation
Translation
“You do not explain the direct meaning of the Brahma-sūtras. Indeed, it appears that your business is to cover their real meaning.”
Word meanings
sūtrera — of the sūtras ; mukhya — direct ; artha — of meanings ; nā — not ; karaha — you do ; vyākhyāna — explanation ; kalpanā - arthe — because of imaginative meaning ; tumi — you ; tāhā — of that ; kara — do ; ācchādana — covering .
Purport
This is typical of all Māyāvādīs or atheists who interpret the meaning of Vedic literature in their own imaginative way. The real purpose of such foolish people is to impose the impersonalist conclusion on all Vedic literature. The Māyāvādī atheists also interpret the Bhagavad-gītā. In every verse of Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā it is clearly stated that Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In every verse Vyāsadeva says, śrī-bhagavān uvāca, “the Supreme Personality of Godhead said,” or “the Blessed Lord said.” It is clearly stated that the Blessed Lord is the Supreme Person, but Māyāvādī atheists still try to prove that the Absolute Truth is impersonal. In order to present their false, imaginary meanings, they must adopt so much word jugglery and grammatical interpretation that they finally become ludicrous. Therefore Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu remarked that no one should hear the Māyāvādī commentaries or purports to any Vedic literature.
Madhya-lila 6.133
Sourceউপনিষদ্-শব্দে যেই মুখ্য অর্থ হয় । সেই অর্থ মুখ্য, — ব্যাসসূত্রে সব কয় ॥ ১৩৩ ॥
upaniṣad-śabde yei mukhya artha haya sei artha mukhya, — vyāsa-sūtre saba kaya
English translation
Translation
Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “The Vedānta-sūtra is the summary of all the Upaniṣads; therefore whatever direct meaning is there in the Upaniṣads is also recorded in the Vedānta-sūtra, or Vyāsa-sūtra.
Word meanings
upaniṣad — of the Vedas ; śabde — by the words ; yei — whatever ; mukhya — direct ; artha — meaning ; haya — is ; sei — that ; artha — meaning ; mukhya — chief ; vyāsa - sūtre — in the Vedānta-sūtra ; saba — all ; kaya — describes .
Purport
Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī has explained the word upaniṣad in his Anubhāṣya. Please refer to Ādi-līlā, second chapter, fifth verse, and Ādi-līlā, seventh chapter, verses 106 and 108, for his explanation.
Madhya-lila 6.134
Sourceমুখ্যার্থ ছাড়িয়া কর গৌণার্থ কল্পনা । ‘অভিধা’-বৃত্তি ছাড়ি’ কর শব্দের লক্ষণা ॥ ১৩৪ ॥
mukhyārtha chāḍiyā kara gauṇārtha kalpanā ‘abhidhā’-vṛtti chāḍi’ kara śabdera lakṣaṇā
English translation
Translation
“For each sūtra the direct meaning must be accepted without interpretation. However, you simply abandon the direct meaning and proceed with your imaginative interpretation.
Word meanings
mukhya - artha — direct meaning ; chāḍiyā — giving up ; kara — you do ; gauṇa - artha — indirect meaning ; kalpanā — imagining ; abhidhā - vṛtti — the meaning that is understood immediately ; chāḍi’ — giving up ; kara — you do ; śabdera — of the words ; lakṣaṇā — interpretation .
Madhya-lila 6.135
Sourceপ্রমাণের মধ্যে শ্রুতি প্রমাণ — প্রধান । শ্রুতি যে মুখ্যার্থ কহে, সেই সে প্রমাণ ॥ ১৩৫ ॥
pramāṇera madhye śruti pramāṇa — pradhāna śruti ye mukhyārtha kahe, sei se pramāṇa
English translation
Translation
“Although there is other evidence, the evidence given in the Vedic version must be taken as foremost. Vedic versions understood directly are first-class evidence.”
Word meanings
pramāṇera — of the evidences ; madhye — in the midst ; śruti — the Vedic version ; pramāṇa — evidence ; pradhāna — chief ; śruti — the Vedic version ; ye — whatever ; mukhya - artha — chief meaning ; kahe — says ; sei se — that indeed ; pramāṇa — evidence .
Purport
Works that should be consulted are Śrīla Jīva Gosvāmī’s Tattva-sandarbha (10-11), Śrīla Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa’s commentary on that, and the following verses of the Brahma-sūtra: śāstra-yonitvāt (Vs. 1.1.3), tarkāpratiṣṭhānāt (Vs. 2.1.11) and śrutes tu śabda-mūlatvāt (Vs. 2.1.27), as commented upon by Śrī Rāmānujācārya, Śrī Madhvācārya, Śrī Nimbārkācārya and Śrīla Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa. In his book Sarva-saṁvādinī, Śrīla Jīva Gosvāmī has noted that although there are ten kinds of evidence — direct perception, the Vedic version, historical reference, hypothesis and so on — and although they are all generally accepted as evidence, the person presenting a hypothesis, reading the Vedic version, perceiving or interpreting by his experience is certain to be imperfect in four ways. That is, he is subject to committing mistakes, to becoming illusioned, to cheating and to having imperfect senses. Although the evidence may be correct, the person himself is in danger of being misled due to his material defects. Apart from the direct presentation, there is a chance that an interpretation may not be perfect. Therefore the conclusion is that only a direct presentation can be considered evidence. An interpretation cannot be accepted as evidence, but may be considered proof of evidence.
In the Bhagavad-gītā, at the very beginning it is stated:
dhṛtarāṣṭra uvāca dharma-kṣetre kuru-kṣetre samavetā yuyutsavaḥ māmakāḥ pāṇḍavāś caiva kim akurvata sañjaya
The statements of the Bhagavad-gītā are themselves proof that there is a place of religious pilgrimage named Kurukṣetra where the Pāṇḍavas and Kurus met to fight. After meeting there, what did they do? This was Dhṛtarāṣṭra’s inquiry to Sañjaya. Although these statements are very clear, atheists try to interpret different meanings of the words dharma-kṣetra and kuru-kṣetra. Therefore Śrīla Jīva Gosvāmī has warned us not to depend on any kind of interpretation. It is better to take the verses as they are, without interpretation.
Madhya-lila 6.136
Sourceজীবের অস্থি-বিষ্ঠা দুই — শঙ্খ-গোময় । শ্রুতি-বাক্যে সেই দুই মহা-পবিত্র হয় ॥ ১৩৬ ॥
jīvera asthi-viṣṭhā dui — śaṅkha-gomaya śruti-vākye sei dui mahā-pavitra haya
English translation
Translation
Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “Conchshells and cow dung are nothing but the bones and the stool of some living entities, but according to the Vedic version they are both considered very pure.
Word meanings
jīvera — of the living entity ; asthi — the bone ; viṣṭhā — stool ; dui — two ; śaṅkha — conchshell ; go - maya — cow dung ; śruti - vākye — in the words of the Vedic version ; sei — that ; dui — two ; mahā — greatly ; pavitra — pure ; haya — are .
Purport
According to Vedic principles, bones and dung are generally considered very impure. If one touches a bone or stool, he must take a bath immediately. That is the Vedic injunction. Yet the Vedas also enjoin that a conchshell, although the bone of an animal, and cow dung, although the stool of an animal, are very much sanctified. Even though such statements appear contradictory, on the basis of the Vedic version we still accept the fact that conchshells and cow dung are pure and sanctified.
Madhya-lila 6.137
Sourceস্বতঃপ্রমাণ বেদ সত্য যেই কয় । ‘লক্ষণা’ করিলে স্বতঃপ্রামাণ্য-হানি হয় ॥ ১৩৭ ॥
svataḥ-pramāṇa veda satya yei kaya ‘lakṣaṇā’ karile svataḥ-prāmāṇya-hāni haya
English translation
Translation
“The Vedic statements are self-evident. Whatever is stated there must be accepted. If we interpret according to our own imagination, the authority of the Vedas is immediately lost.”
Word meanings
svataḥ - pramāṇa — self-evidence ; veda — Vedic literature ; satya — truth ; yei — whatever ; kaya — say ; lakṣaṇā — interpretation ; karile — by making ; svataḥ - prāmāṇya — self-evidential proof ; hāni — lost ; haya — becomes .
Purport
Out of four main types of evidence — direct perception, hypothesis, historical reference and the Vedas — Vedic evidence is accepted as the foremost. If we want to interpret the Vedic version, we must imagine an interpretation according to what we want to do. First of all, we set forth such an interpretation as a suggestion or hypothesis. As such, it is not actually true, and the self-evident proof is lost.
Śrīla Madhvācārya, commenting on the aphorism dṛśyate tu ( Vedānta-sūtra 2.1.6), quotes the Bhaviṣya Purāṇa as follows:
ṛg-yajuḥ-sāmātharvāś ca bhārataṁ pañcarātrakam mūla-rāmāyaṇaṁ caiva veda ity eva śabditāḥ
purāṇāni ca yānīha vaiṣṇavāni vido viduḥ svataḥ-prāmāṇyam eteṣāṁ nātra kiñcid vicāryate
The Ṛg Veda, Yajur Veda, Sāma Veda, Atharva Veda, Mahābhārata, Pañcarātra and original Rāmāyaṇa are all considered Vedic literature. The Purāṇas that are especially meant for Vaiṣṇavas (such as the Brahma-vaivarta Purāṇa, Nāradīya Purāṇa, Viṣṇu Purāṇa and Bhāgavata Purāṇa ) are also Vedic literature. Therefore, whatever is stated in such Purāṇas or in the Mahābhārata and Rāmāyaṇa is self-evident. There is no need for interpretation. The Bhagavad-gītā is also within the Mahābhārata; therefore all the statements of the Bhagavad-gītā are self-evident. There is no need for interpretation, and if we do interpret, the entire authority of the Vedic literature is lost.
Madhya-lila 6.138
Sourceব্যাস-সূত্রের অর্থ — যৈছে সূর্যের কিরণ । স্বকল্পিত ভাষ্য-মেঘে করে আচ্ছাদন ॥ ১৩৮ ॥
vyāsa-sūtrera artha — yaiche sūryera kiraṇa sva-kalpita bhāṣya-meghe kare ācchādana
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “The Brahma-sūtra, compiled by Śrīla Vyāsadeva, is as radiant as the sun. One who tries to interpret its meaning simply covers that sunshine with a cloud.
Word meanings
vyāsa - sūtrera — of the Vedānta-sūtra, by Vyāsadeva ; artha — the meanings ; yaiche — just as ; sūryera — of the sun ; kiraṇa — shining rays ; sva - kalpita — imaginative ; bhāṣya — of the commentary ; meghe — by the cloud ; kare — does ; ācchādana — covering .
Madhya-lila 6.139
Sourceবেদ-পুরাণে কহে ব্রহ্ম-নিরূপণ । সেই ব্রহ্ম — বৃহদ্বস্তু, ঈশ্বর-লক্ষণ ॥ ১৩৯ ॥
veda-purāṇe kahe brahma-nirūpaṇa sei brahma — bṛhad-vastu, īśvara-lakṣaṇa
English translation
Translation
“All the Vedas and literature that strictly follows the Vedic principles explain that the Supreme Brahman is the Absolute Truth, the greatest of all, and a feature of the Supreme Lord.
Word meanings
veda - purāṇe — in the Vedas and the Purāṇas ; kahe — it is stated ; brahma - nirūpaṇa — explaining the Supreme ; sei brahma — that Supreme ; bṛhat - vastu — the greatest ; īśvara - lakṣaṇa — feature of the Supreme Personality .
Purport
The greatest of everything is Śrī Kṛṣṇa. Lord Kṛṣṇa states in the Bhagavad-gītā (15.15) , vedaiś ca sarvair aham eva vedyaḥ: “By all the Vedas, I am to be known.” In Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.2.11) it is said that the Absolute Truth is understood in three phases — namely, Brahman, Paramātmā and Bhagavān, the Supreme Personality of Godhead ( brahmeti paramātmeti bhagavān iti śabdyate ) . Thus the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the last word in understanding the Absolute Truth, Brahman.
Madhya-lila 6.140
Sourceসর্বৈশ্বর্যপরিপূর্ণ স্বয়ং ভগবান্ । তাঁরে নিরাকার করি’ করহ ব্যাখ্যান ॥ ১৪০ ॥
sarvaiśvarya-paripūrṇa svayaṁ bhagavān tāṅre nirākāra kari’ karaha vyākhyāna
English translation
Translation
“Actually, the Supreme Absolute Truth is a person, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, full with all opulences. You are trying to explain Him as impersonal and formless.
Word meanings
sarva - aiśvarya - paripūrṇa — full with all opulences ; svayam — personally ; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tāṅre — Him ; nirākāra — impersonal ; kari’ — making ; karaha — you make ; vyākhyāna — explanation, .
Purport
Brahman means bṛhattva, the greatest of all. The greatest of all is Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He possesses all potencies and opulence in full; therefore the Absolute Truth, the greatest of all, is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Whether one says “Brahman” or “the Supreme Personality of Godhead,” the fact is the same, for they are identical. In the Bhagavad-gītā, Arjuna accepted Kṛṣṇa as paraṁ brahma paraṁ dhāma. Although the living entities or material nature are sometimes described as Brahman, Parabrahman — the Supreme, the greatest of all Brahmans — is still Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is full with all opulences, and as such He possesses all riches, all strength, all reputation, all knowledge, all beauty and all renunciation. He is eternally a person and eternally supreme. If one tries to explain the Supreme impersonally, one distorts the real meaning of Brahman.
Madhya-lila 6.141
Source‘নির্বিশেষ’ তাঁরে কহে যেই শ্রুতিগণ । ‘প্রাকৃত’ নিষেধি করে ‘অপ্রাকৃত’ স্থাপন ॥ ১৪১ ॥
‘nirviśeṣa’ tāṅre kahe yei śruti-gaṇa ‘prākṛta’ niṣedhi kare ‘aprākṛta’ sthāpana
English translation
Translation
“Wherever there is an impersonal description in the Vedas, the Vedas mean to establish that everything belonging to the Supreme Personality of Godhead is transcendental and free of mundane characteristics.”
Word meanings
nirviśeṣa — impersonal ; tāṅre — Him ; kahe — say ; yei — whatever ; śruti - gaṇa — the Vedas ; prākṛta — mundane ; niṣedhi — forbidding ; kare — does ; aprākṛta — transcendental ; sthāpana — confirmation .
Purport
There are many impersonal statements about the Supreme Personality of Godhead. As stated in the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad (3.19):
apāṇi-pādo javano grahītā paśyaty acakṣuḥ sa śṛṇoty akarṇaḥ sa vetti vedyaṁ na ca tasyāsti vettā tam āhur agryaṁ puruṣaṁ mahāntam
Although the Supreme Lord is described as having no hands and legs, He nonetheless accepts all sacrificial offerings. He has no eyes, yet He sees everything. He has no ears, yet He hears everything. When it is stated that the Supreme Lord has no hands and legs, one should not think that He is impersonal. Rather, He has no mundane hands or legs like ours. “He has no eyes, yet He sees.” This means that He does not have mundane, limited eyes like ours. Rather, He has such eyes that He can see past, present and future, everywhere, in every corner of the universe and in every corner of the heart of every living entity. Thus the impersonal descriptions in the Vedas intend to deny mundane characteristics in the Supreme Lord. They do not intend to establish the Supreme Lord as impersonal.
Madhya-lila 6.142
Sourceযা যা শ্রুতির্জল্পতি নির্বিশেষং সা সাভিধত্তে সবিশেষমেব । বিচারযোগে সতি হন্ত তাসাং প্রায়ো বলীয়ঃ সবিশেষমেব ॥ ১৪২ ॥
yā yā śrutir jalpati nirviśeṣaṁ sā sābhidhatte sa-viśeṣam eva vicāra-yoge sati hanta tāsāṁ prāyo balīyaḥ sa-viśeṣam eva
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “ ‘Whatever Vedic mantras describe the Absolute Truth impersonally only prove in the end that the Absolute Truth is a person. The Supreme Lord is understood in two features — impersonal and personal. If one considers the Supreme Personality of Godhead in both features, he can actually understand the Absolute Truth. He knows that the personal understanding is stronger because we see that everything is full of variety. No one can see anything that is not full of variety.’
Word meanings
yā yā — whatever ; śrutiḥ — the Vedic hymns ; jalpati — describe ; nirviśeṣam — impersonal truth ; sā — that ; sā — that ; abhidhatte — directly describes (like a dictionary meaning) ; sa - viśeṣam — personality ; eva — certainly ; vicāra - yoge — when accepted by intelligence ; sati — being ; hanta — alas ; tāsām — of all the Vedic mantras ; prāyaḥ — mostly ; balīyaḥ — more powerful ; sa - viśeṣam — personal variety ; eva — certainly .
Purport
This is a quotation from Śrī Caitanya-candrodaya-nāṭaka (6.67), by Kavi-karṇapūra.
Madhya-lila 6.143
Sourceব্রহ্ম হৈতে জন্মে বিশ্ব, ব্রহ্মেতে জীবয় । সেই ব্ৰহ্মে পুনরপি হয়ে যায় লয় ॥ ১৪৩ ॥
brahma haite janme viśva, brahmete jīvaya sei brahme punarapi haye yāya laya
English translation
Translation
“Everything in the cosmic manifestation emanates from the Absolute Truth, remains in the Absolute Truth, and after annihilation again enters the Absolute Truth.
Word meanings
brahma haite — from the Supreme Brahman ; janme — emanates ; viśva — the whole cosmic manifestation ; brahmete — in the Absolute Truth ; jīvaya — exists ; sei — that ; brahme — in the Absolute Truth ; punarapi — again ; haye — being ; yāya — goes ; laya — to annihilation .
Purport
In the Taittirīya Upaniṣad (3.1) it is said, yato vā imāni bhūtāni jāyante: “The entire material cosmic manifestation is born of the Supreme Brahman.” Also, the Brahma-sūtra begins with the verse janmādy asya yataḥ: “The Absolute Truth is that from whom everything emanates.” (Bs. 1.1.2) That Absolute Truth is Kṛṣṇa. In the Bhagavad-gītā (10.8) , Kṛṣṇa says, ahaṁ sarvasya prabhavo mattaḥ sarvaṁ pravartate: “I am the source of all spiritual and material worlds. Everything emanates from Me.” Therefore Kṛṣṇa is the original Absolute Truth, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Again, Kṛṣṇa states in the Bhagavad-gītā (9.4) , mayā tatam idaṁ sarvaṁ jagad avyakta-mūrtinā: “By Me, in My unmanifested form, this entire universe is pervaded.” And as confirmed in the Brahma-saṁhitā (5.37) , goloka eva nivasaty akhilātma-bhūtaḥ: “Although the Lord always stays in His abode, Goloka Vṛndāvana, He is still all-pervading.” His all-pervasive feature is understood to be impersonal because one does not find the form of the Lord in that all-pervasiveness. Actually, everything is resting on the rays of His bodily effulgence. The Brahma-saṁhitā (5.40) also states:
yasya prabhā prabhavato jagad-aṇḍa-koṭi- koṭiṣv aśeṣa-vasudhādi-vibhūti-bhinnam
Due to the rays of the Lord’s bodily effulgence, millions of universes are created, just as planets are created from the sun.
Madhya-lila 6.144
Source‘অপাদান’, ‘করণ’ এবং ‘অধিকরণ’-কারক তিন । ভগবানের সবিশেষে এই তিন চিহ্ন ॥ ১৪৪ ॥
‘apādāna,’ ‘karaṇa,’ ‘adhikaraṇa’-kāraka tina bhagavānera saviśeṣe ei tina cihna
English translation
Translation
“The personal features of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are categorized in three cases — namely ablative, instrumental and locative.”
Word meanings
apādāna — ablative ; karaṇa — instrumental ; adhikaraṇa — locative ; kāraka — cases ; tina — three ; bhagavānera — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; sa - viśeṣa — in the personality ; ei — these ; tina — three ; cihna — symptoms .
Purport
Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura states in his Amṛta-pravāha-bhāṣya that according to the injunction of the Upaniṣads (“the Supreme Absolute Truth is He from whom everything emanates”), it is understood that the whole cosmic manifestation emanated from Brahman, the Supreme Absolute Truth. The creation subsists by the energy of the Supreme Brahman and, after annihilation, merges into the Supreme Brahman. From this we can understand that the Absolute Truth can be categorized in three cases — ablative, instrumental and locative. According to these three cases, the Absolute Truth is positively personified. In this connection, Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī quotes the Aitareya Upaniṣad (1.1.1): ātmā vā idam eka evāgra āsīn nānyat kiñcana miṣat sa īkṣata lokān nu sṛjā iti. Similarly, in the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad (4.9) it is stated:
chandāṁsi yajñāḥ kratavo vratāni bhūtaṁ bhavyaṁ yac ca vedā vadanti yasmān māyī sṛjate viśvam etat tasmiṁś cānyo māyayā sanniruddhaḥ
And in the Taittirīya Upaniṣad (3.1): yato vā imāni bhūtāni jāyante, yena jātāni jīvanti, yat prayanty abhisaṁviśanti, tad vijijñāsasva tad brahma. This was the answer given by father Varuṇa when questioned by his son Vāruṇi Bhṛgu about the Absolute Truth. In this mantra, the word yataḥ, the Absolute Truth from which the cosmic manifestation has emanated, is in the ablative case; that Brahman by which this universal creation is maintained is in the instrumental case ( yena ); and that Brahman into which the whole cosmic manifestation merges is in the locative case ( yat or yasmin ) . It is stated in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.5.20) :
idaṁ hi viśvaṁ bhagavān ivetaro yato jagat-sthāna-nirodha-sambhavāḥ
“The entire universal creation is contained in the gigantic form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Everything emanates from Him, everything rests in His energy, and after annihilation everything merges into His person.”
Madhya-lila 6.145-146
Sourceভগবান্ বহু হৈতে যবে কৈল মন । প্রাকৃত-শক্তিতে তবে কৈল বিলোকন ॥ ১৪৫ ॥ সে কালে নাহি জন্মে ‘প্রাকৃত’ মনোনয়ন । অতএব ‘অপ্রাকৃত’ ব্রহ্মের নেত্র-মন ॥ ১৪৬ ॥
bhagavān bahu haite yabe kaila mana prākṛta-śaktite tabe kaila vilokana se kāle nāhi janme ‘prākṛta’ mano-nayana ataeva ‘aprākṛta’ brahmera netra-mana
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “When the Supreme Personality of Godhead wished to become many, He glanced over the material energy. Before the creation there were no mundane eyes or mind; therefore the transcendental nature of the Absolute Truth’s mind and eyes is confirmed.
Word meanings
bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; bahu — many ; haite — to become ; yabe — when ; kaila — made ; mana — His mind ; prākṛta — material ; śaktite — on the energy ; tabe — at that time ; kaila — did ; vilokana — glancing ; se kāle — at that time ; nāhi — not ; janme — in creation ; prākṛta — mundane ; manaḥ - nayana — mind and eyes ; ataeva — therefore ; aprākṛta — transcendental ; brahmera — of the Absolute Truth ; netra - mana — eyes and mind .
Purport
In the Chāndogya Upaniṣad (6.2.3), it is said, tad aikṣata bahu syāṁ prajāyeya. This statement confirms the fact that when the Supreme Personality of Godhead wishes to become many, the cosmic manifestation arises simply by His glancing over material energy. It may be noted that the Supreme Lord glanced over the material nature before the creation of this cosmic manifestation. Before the creation there were no material minds or material eyes; therefore the mind by which the Supreme Personality of Godhead desired to create is transcendental, and the eyes with which He glanced over material nature are also transcendental. Thus the Lord’s mind, eyes and other senses are all transcendental.
Madhya-lila 6.147
Sourceব্রহ্ম-শব্দে কহে পূর্ণ স্বয়ং ভগবান্ । স্বয়ং ভগবান্ কৃষ্ণ, — শাস্ত্রের প্রমাণ ॥ ১৪৭ ॥
brahma-śabde kahe pūrṇa svayaṁ bhagavān svayaṁ bhagavān kṛṣṇa, — śāstrera pramāṇa
English translation
Translation
“The word ‘Brahman’ indicates the complete Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is Śrī Kṛṣṇa. That is the verdict of all Vedic literature.
Word meanings
brahma - śabde — by the word “Brahman” ; kahe — it is said ; pūrṇa — complete ; svayam — personally ; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; svayam — personally ; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; śāstrera pramāṇa — the verdict of all Vedic literature .
Purport
This is also confirmed in the Bhagavad-gītā (15.15) , where the Lord says, vedaiś ca sarvair aham eva vedyaḥ. The ultimate object in all Vedic literature is Kṛṣṇa. Everyone is searching for Him. This is also confirmed elsewhere in the Bhagavad-gītā (7.19) :
bahūnāṁ janmanām ante jñānavān māṁ prapadyate vāsudevaḥ sarvam iti sa mahātmā sudurlabhaḥ
“After many births and deaths, he who is actually in knowledge surrenders unto Me, knowing Me to be the cause of all causes and all that is. Such a great soul is very rare.”
When one has actually become wise through the study of Vedic literature, he surrenders unto Vāsudeva, Bhagavān Śrī Kṛṣṇa. This is also confirmed in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.2.7-8):
vāsudeve bhagavati bhakti-yogaḥ prayojitaḥ janayaty āśu vairāgyaṁ jñānaṁ ca yad ahaitukam
dharmaḥ sv-anuṣṭhitaḥ puṁsāṁ viṣvaksena-kathāsu yaḥ notpādayed yadi ratiṁ śrama eva hi kevalam
Understanding Vāsudeva is real knowledge. By engaging in the devotional service of Vāsudeva, Kṛṣṇa, one acquires perfect knowledge and Vedic understanding. Thus one becomes detached from the material world. This is the perfection of human life. Although one may perfectly follow religious rituals and ceremonies, he is simply wasting his time ( śrama eva hi kevalam ) if he does not attain this perfection.
Before the creation of the cosmic manifestation, the Supreme Personality of Godhead possessed His totally transcendental mind and eyes. That Supreme Personality of Godhead is Kṛṣṇa. A person may think that there is no direct statement about Kṛṣṇa in the Upaniṣads, but the fact is that the Vedic mantras cannot be understood by people with mundane senses. As stated in the Padma Purāṇa, ataḥ śrī-kṛṣṇa-nāmādi na bhaved grāhyam indriyaiḥ: a person with mundane senses cannot fully understand the name, qualities, form and pastimes of Śrī Kṛṣṇa. The Purāṇas are therefore meant to explain and supplement Vedic knowledge. The great sages present the Purāṇas in order to make the Vedic mantras understandable for common men ( strī-śūdra-dvija-bandhūnām ) . Considering that women, śūdras and dvija- bandhus (unworthy sons of the twice-born) cannot understand the Vedic hymns directly, Śrīla Vyāsadeva compiled the Mahābhārata. Actually, the Supreme Personality of Godhead is vedeṣu durlabham (untraceable in the Vedas ), but when the Vedas are properly understood or when Vedic knowledge is received from devotees, one can understand that all Vedic knowledge leads to Śrī Kṛṣṇa.
The Brahma-sūtra (1.1.3) confirms this fact also: śāstra-yonitvāt. commenting upon this Brahma-sūtra aphorism, Śrī Madhvācārya says, “The Ṛg Veda, Yajur Veda, Sāma Veda, Atharva Veda, Mahābhārata, Pañcarātra and the original Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa are all Vedic literatures. Any literature following the conclusive statements of these Vedic literatures is also to be considered Vedic literature. That literature which does not conform to Vedic literature is simply misleading.”
Therefore when reading Vedic literature, we must take the path traversed by great ācāryas: mahā-jano yena gataḥ sa panthāḥ. Unless one follows the path traversed by great ācāryas, he cannot understand the real purport of the Vedas.
Madhya-lila 6.148
Sourceবেদের নিগূঢ় অর্থ বুঝন না হয় । পুরাণ-বাক্যে সেই অর্থ করয় নিশ্চয় ॥ ১৪৮ ॥
vedera nigūḍha artha bujhana nā haya purāṇa-vākye sei artha karaya niścaya
English translation
Translation
“The confidential meaning of the Vedas is not easily understood by common men; therefore that meaning is supplemented by the words of the Purāṇas.
Word meanings
vedera — of the Vedic literature ; nigūḍha — confidential ; artha — meaning ; bujhana — understanding ; nā — not ; haya — is ; purāṇa - vākye — by the words of the Purāṇas ; sei — that ; artha — meaning ; karaya — makes ; niścaya — certain .
Madhya-lila 6.149
Sourceঅহো ভাগ্যমহো ভাগ্যং নন্দগোপব্রজৌকসাম্ । যন্মিত্রং পরমানন্দং পূর্ণং ব্রহ্ম সনাতনম্ ॥ ১৪৯ ॥
aho bhāgyam aho bhāgyaṁ nanda-gopa-vrajaukasām yan-mitraṁ paramānandaṁ pūrṇaṁ brahma sanātanam
English translation
Translation
“ ‘How greatly fortunate are Nanda Mahārāja, the cowherd men and all the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi! There is no limit to their fortune, because the Absolute Truth, the source of transcendental bliss, the eternal Supreme Brahman, has become their friend.’
Word meanings
aho — what great ; bhāgyam — fortune ; aho — what great ; bhāgyam — fortune ; nanda — of Mahārāja Nanda ; gopa — of other cowherd men ; vraja - okasām — of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi ; yat — of whom ; mitram — friend ; parama - ānandam — the supreme bliss ; pūrṇam — complete ; brahma — the Absolute Truth ; sanātanam — eternal .
Purport
This quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.14.32) is spoken by Lord Brahmā.
Madhya-lila 6.150
Source‘অপাণি-পাদ’-শ্রুতি বর্জে ‘প্রাকৃত’ পাণি-চরণ । পুনঃ কহে, শীঘ্র চলে, করে সর্ব গ্রহণ ॥ ১৫০ ॥
‘apāṇi-pāda’-śruti varje ‘prākṛta’ pāṇi-caraṇa punaḥ kahe, śīghra cale, kare sarva grahaṇa
English translation
Translation
“The Vedic ‘apāṇi-pāda’ mantra rejects material hands and legs, yet it states that the Lord goes very fast and accepts everything offered to Him.
Word meanings
apāṇi - pāda - śruti — the śruti-mantra beginning apāni-pādaḥ ; varje — rejects ; prākṛta — material ; pāṇi - caraṇa — hands and legs ; punaḥ — again ; kahe — says ; śīghra cale — walks very fast ; kare — does ; sarva — of everything ; grahaṇa — accepting .
Madhya-lila 6.151
Sourceঅতএব শ্রুতি কহে, ব্রহ্ম — সবিশেষ । ‘মুখ্য’ ছাড়ি’ ‘লক্ষণা’তে মানে নির্বিশেষ ॥ ১৫১ ॥
ataeva śruti kahe, brahma — saviśeṣa ‘mukhya’ chāḍi’ ‘lakṣaṇā’te māne nirviśeṣa
English translation
Translation
“All these mantras confirm that the Absolute Truth is personal, but the Māyāvādīs, throwing away the direct meaning, interpret the Absolute Truth as impersonal.
Word meanings
ataeva — therefore ; śruti — Vedic mantras ; kahe — say ; brahma — the Absolute Truth ; sa - viśeṣa — personal ; mukhya — direct meaning ; chāḍi’ — giving up ; lakṣaṇā’te — by interpretation ; māne — accept ; nirviśeṣa — impersonal .
Purport
As mentioned above, the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad (3.19) states:
apāṇi-pādo javano grahītā paśyaty acakṣuḥ sa śṛṇoty akarṇaḥ sa vetti vedyaṁ na ca tasyāsti vettā tam āhur agryaṁ puruṣaṁ mahāntam
This Vedic mantra clearly states, puruṣaṁ mahāntam. The word puruṣa means “person.” In the Bhagavad-gītā (10.12) Arjuna confirms that this person is Kṛṣṇa when he addresses Kṛṣṇa as puruṣaṁ śāśvatam: “You are the original person.” Thus the puruṣaṁ mahāntam mentioned in the verse from the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad is Śrī Kṛṣṇa. His hands and legs are not mundane but are completely transcendental. However, when He comes, fools take Him to be an ordinary person ( avajānanti māṁ mūḍhā mānuṣīṁ tanum āśritam ) . One who has no Vedic knowledge, who has not studied the Vedas from a bona fide spiritual master, does not know Kṛṣṇa. Therefore he is a mūḍha. Such fools take Kṛṣṇa to be an ordinary person ( paraṁ bhāvam ajānantaḥ ) . They do not actually know what Kṛṣṇa is. Manuṣyāṇāṁ sahasreṣu kaścid yatati siddhaye. It is not possible to understand Kṛṣṇa simply by studying the Vedas perfectly. One must have the mercy of a devotee ( yat-pādam ) . Unless one is favored by a devotee, he cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Arjuna also confirms this in the Bhagavad-gītā (10.14) : “My Lord, it is very difficult to understand Your personality.” The less intelligent class of men cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead without being favored by His devotee. Therefore the Bhagavad-gītā (4.34) contains another injunction:
tad viddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā upadekṣyanti te jñānaṁ jñāninas tattva-darśinaḥ
One has to approach a bona fide spiritual master and surrender to him. Only then can one understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead as a person.
Madhya-lila 6.152
Sourceষড়ৈশ্বর্যপূর্ণানন্দ-বিগ্রহ যাঁহার । হেন-ভগবানে তুমি কহ নিরাকার? ॥ ১৫২ ॥
ṣaḍ-aiśvarya-pūrṇānanda-vigraha yāṅhāra hena-bhagavāne tumi kaha nirākāra?
English translation
Translation
“Are you describing as formless that Supreme Personality of Godhead whose transcendental form is complete with six transcendental opulences?
Word meanings
ṣaṭ - aiśvarya - pūrṇa — with six opulences in full ; ānanda — blissful ; vigraha — form ; yāṅhāra — whose ; hena - bhagavāne — unto that Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tumi — you ; kaha — said ; nirākāra — without any form .
Purport
If the Supreme Personality of Godhead is formless, how can He be said to walk very fast and accept everything offered to Him? Rejecting the direct meaning of the Vedic mantras, the Māyāvādī philosophers interpret them and try to establish the Absolute Truth as formless. Actually, the Supreme Lord has an eternal personal form full of all opulence. The Māyāvādī philosophers try to interpret the Absolute Truth as being without potency. However, in the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad (6.8) it is clearly said, parāsya śaktir vividhaiva śrūyate: “The Absolute Truth has multipotencies.”
Madhya-lila 6.153
Sourceস্বাভাবিক তিন শক্তি যেই ব্রহ্মে হয় । ‘নিঃশক্তিক’ করি’ তাঁরে করহ নিশ্চয়? ১৫৩ ॥
svābhāvika tina śakti yei brahme haya ‘niḥśaktika’ kari’ tāṅre karaha niścaya?
English translation
Translation
“The Supreme Personality of Godhead has three primary potencies. Are you trying to prove that He has no potencies?
Word meanings
svābhāvika — by nature ; tina — three ; śakti — potencies ; yei — which ; brahme — in the Absolute Truth ; haya — there are ; niḥśaktika — without potency ; kari’ — making ; tāṅre — Him ; karaha — you do ; niścaya — proof .
Purport
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu now quotes four verses from the Viṣṇu Purāṇa (6.7.61-63 and 1.12.69) to explain the different potencies of the Lord.
Madhya-lila 6.154
Sourceবিষ্ণুশক্তিঃ পরা প্রোক্তা ক্ষেত্রজ্ঞাখ্যা তথাপরা । অবিদ্যাকর্মসংজ্ঞান্যা তৃতীয়া শক্তিরিষ্যতে ॥ ১৫৪ ॥
viṣṇu-śaktiḥ parā proktā kṣetra-jñākhyā tathā parā avidyā-karma-saṁjñānyā tṛtīyā śaktir iṣyate
English translation
Translation
“ ‘The internal potency of the Supreme Lord, Viṣṇu, is spiritual, as verified by the śāstras. There is another spiritual potency, known as kṣetra-jña, or the living entity. The third potency, which is known as nescience, makes the living entity godless and fills him with fruitive activity.
Word meanings
viṣṇu - śaktiḥ — the internal potency of Lord Viṣṇu, the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; parā — spiritual ; proktā — said ; kṣetra - jña — the living entities ; ākhyā — known as ; tathā — also ; parā — spiritual ; avidyā — nescience, or godlessness ; karma — and fruitive activities ; saṁjñā — known as ; anyā — another ; tṛtīyā — third ; śaktiḥ — potency ; iṣyate — is accepted as .
Purport
In the Bhagavad-gītā, in Śrī Kṛṣṇa’s discourse on the kṣetra and the kṣetra-jña, it is clearly stated that the kṣetra-jña is the living entity, who knows his field of activities. The living entities in the material world are forgetful of their eternal relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This forgetfulness is called avidyā, or nescience. The avidyā-śakti, the avidyā potency of the material world, provokes fruitive activity. Although this avidyā-śakti (material energy, or nescience) is also an energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, it is especially intended to keep the living entities in a state of forgetfulness. This is due to their rebellious attitude toward the Lord. Thus although the living entities are constitutionally spiritual, they come under the influence of the potency of nescience. How this happens is described in the following verse.
Madhya-lila 6.155
Sourceযয়া ক্ষেত্রজ্ঞশক্তিঃ সা বেষ্টিতা নৃপ সর্বগা । সংসারতাপানখিলানবাপ্নোত্যত্র সন্ততান্ ॥ ১৫৫ ॥
yayā kṣetra-jña-śaktiḥ sā veṣṭitā nṛpa sarva-gā saṁsāra-tāpān akhilān avāpnoty atra santatān
English translation
Translation
“ ‘O King, the kṣetra-jña-śakti is the living entity. Although he has the facility to live in either the material or spiritual world, he suffers the threefold miseries of material existence because he is influenced by the avidyā [nescience] potency, which covers his constitutional position.
Word meanings
yayā — by which ; kṣetra - jña - śaktiḥ — the living entities, known as the kṣetra-jña potency ; sā — that potency ; veṣṭitā — covered ; nṛpa — O King ; sarva - gā — capable of going anywhere in the spiritual or material worlds ; saṁsāra - tāpān — miseries due to the cycle of repeated birth and death ; akhilān — all kinds of ; avāpnoti — obtains ; atra — in this material world ; santatān — arising from suffering or enjoying various kinds of reactions to fruitive activities .
Madhya-lila 6.156
Sourceতয়া তিরোহিতত্বাচ্চ শক্তিঃ ক্ষেত্রজ্ঞসংজ্ঞিতা । সর্বভূতেষু ভূপাল তারতম্যেন বর্ততে ॥ ১৫৬ ॥
tayā tirohitatvāc ca śaktiḥ kṣetra-jña-saṁjñitā sarva-bhūteṣu bhū-pāla tāratamyena vartate
English translation
Translation
“ ‘This living entity, covered by the influence of nescience, exists in different forms in the material condition. O King, he is thus proportionately freed from the influence of material energy, to a greater or lesser degree.’
Word meanings
tayā — by her ; tirohitatvāt — from being freed from the influence ; ca — also ; śaktiḥ — the potency ; kṣetra - jña — kṣetra-jña ; saṁjñitā — known by the name ; sarva - bhūteṣu — in different types of bodies ; bhū - pāla — O King ; tāratamyena — in different degrees ; vartate — exists .
Purport
The material energy acts on the living entity in different degrees, according to how he acquires the association of the three modes of material nature. There are 8,400,000 species of life, some inferior, some superior and some mediocre. The gradations of the bodies are calculated according to the covering of material energy. In the lower categories — including aquatics, trees, plants, insects, birds and so forth — spiritual consciousness is almost nonexistent. In the mediocre category — the human form of life — spiritual consciousness is comparatively awakened. In the superior life forms, spiritual consciousness is fully awakened. Then the living entity understands his real position and tries to escape the influence of material energy by developing Kṛṣṇa consciousness.
Madhya-lila 6.157
Sourceহ্লাদিনী সন্ধিনী সম্বিৎ ত্বয্যেকা সর্বসংশ্রয়ে । হ্লাদতাপকরী মিশ্রা ত্বয়ি নো গুণ-বর্জিতে ॥ ১৫৭ ॥
hlādinī sandhinī samvit tvayy ekā sarva-saṁśraye hlāda-tāpa-karī miśrā tvayi no guṇa-varjite
English translation
Translation
“ ‘The Supreme Personality of Godhead is sac-cid-ānanda-vigraha. This means that He originally has three potencies — the pleasure potency, the potency of eternality and the potency of knowledge. Together these are called the cit potency, and they are present in full in the Supreme Lord. For the living entities, who are part and parcel of the Lord, the pleasure potency in the material world is sometimes displeasing and sometimes mixed. This is not the case with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, because He is not under the influence of the material energy or its modes.’
Word meanings
hlādinī — the pleasure potency ; sandhinī — the eternity potency ; samvit — the knowledge potency ; tvayi — in You ; ekā — one spiritual ( cit ) potency ; sarva - saṁśraye — the shelter of everything ; hlāda — pleasure ; tāpa - karī — causing displeasure ; miśrā — mixed ; tvayi — in You ; na u — not ; guṇa - varjite — devoid of all material qualities .
Madhya-lila 6.158
Sourceসচ্চিদানন্দময় হয় ঈশ্বর-স্বরূপ । তিন অংশে চিচ্ছক্তি হয় তিন রূপ ॥ ১৫৮ ॥
sac-cid-ānanda-maya haya īśvara-svarūpa tina aṁśe cic-chakti haya tina rūpa
English translation
Translation
“The Supreme Personality of Godhead in His original form is full of eternity, knowledge and bliss. The spiritual potency in these three portions [sat, cit and ānanda] assumes three different forms.
Word meanings
sat - cit - ānanda - maya — full of eternity, knowledge and bliss ; haya — is ; īśvara — of the Supreme Lord ; svarūpa — the transcendental form ; tina aṁśe — in three parts ; cit - śakti — the spiritual potency ; haya — becomes ; tina — three ; rūpa — forms .
Purport
According to the verdict of all Vedic literature, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the living entity and the illusory energy (this material world) constitute the subject matter of knowledge. Everyone should try to understand the relationship between them. First of all, one should try to understand the nature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. From the śāstras we understand that the nature of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the sum total of eternity, bliss and knowledge. As stated in verse 154 ( viṣṇu-śaktiḥ parā proktā ), the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the reservoir of all potencies, and His potencies are all spiritual.
Madhya-lila 6.159
Sourceআনন্দাংশে ‘হ্লাদিনী’, সদংশে ‘সন্ধিনী’ । চিদংশে ‘সম্বিৎ’, যারে জ্ঞান করি মানি ॥ ১৫৯ ॥
ānandāṁśe ‘hlādinī,’ sad-aṁśe ‘sandhinī’ cid-aṁśe ‘samvit’, yāre jñāna kari māni
English translation
Translation
“The three portions of the spiritual potency are called hlādinī [the bliss portion], sandhinī [the eternity portion] and samvit [the knowledge portion]. We accept knowledge of these as full knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Word meanings
ānanda - aṁśe — in the part of bliss ; hlādinī — the pleasure potency ; sat - aṁśe — in the part of eternity ; sandhinī — the sandhinī potency ; cit - aṁśe — in the part of knowledge ; samvit — the samvit potency ; yāre — which ; jñāna — as knowledge ; kari māni — we accept .
Purport
To acquire knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, one must take shelter of the samvit potency of the Supreme Lord.
Madhya-lila 6.160
Sourceঅন্তরঙ্গা — চিচ্ছক্তি, তটস্থা — জীবশক্তি । বহিরঙ্গা — মায়া, — তিনে করে প্রেমভক্তি ॥ ১৬০ ॥
antaraṅgā — cic-chakti, taṭasthā — jīva-śakti bahiraṅgā — māyā, — tine kare prema-bhakti
English translation
Translation
“The spiritual potency of the Supreme Personality of Godhead also appears in three phases — internal, marginal and external. These are all engaged in His devotional service in love.
Word meanings
antaraṅgā — the internal potency ; cit - śakti — the spiritual potency ; taṭasthā — the marginal potency ; jīva - śakti — the living entities ; bahiraṅgā — the external potency ; māyā — the illusory energy ; tine — all three of them ; kare — do ; prema - bhakti — devotional service in love .
Purport
The spiritual potency of the Lord is manifested in three phases — the internal or spiritual potency, the marginal potency, which consists of the living entities, and the external potency, known as māyā-śakti. We must understand that in each of these three phases the original spiritual potencies of pleasure, eternity and knowledge remain intact. When the potencies of spiritual pleasure and knowledge are both bestowed upon the conditioned souls, the conditioned souls can escape the clutches of the external potency, māyā, which acts as a cover obscuring one’s spiritual identity. When freed, the living entity awakens to Kṛṣṇa consciousness and engages in devotional service with love and affection.
Madhya-lila 6.161
Sourceষড়্বিধ ঐশ্বর্য — প্রভুর চিচ্ছক্তি-বিলাস । হেন শক্তি নাহি মান, — পরম সাহস ॥ ১৬১ ॥
ṣaḍ-vidha aiśvarya — prabhura cic-chakti-vilāsa hena śakti nāhi māna, — parama sāhasa
English translation
Translation
“In His spiritual potency, the Supreme Lord enjoys six kinds of opulences. You do not accept this spiritual potency, and this is due to your great impudence.
Word meanings
ṣaṭ - vidha — six kinds ; aiśvarya — of opulences ; prabhura — of the Lord ; cit - śakti - vilāsa — enjoyment in the spiritual potency ; hena śakti — such sublime potencies ; nāhi — not ; māna — you accept ; parama sāhasa — great impudence .
Purport
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is full with six opulences. All of these potencies are on the transcendental platform. To understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead as impersonal and devoid of potency is to go completely against Vedic information.
Madhya-lila 6.162
Source‘মায়াধীশ’ ‘মায়াবশ’ — ঈশ্বরে-জীবে ভেদ । হেন-জীবে ঈশ্বর-সহ কহ ত’ অভেদ ॥ ১৬২ ॥
‘māyādhīśa’ ‘māyā-vaśa’ — īśvare-jīve bheda hena-jīve īśvara-saha kaha ta’ abheda
English translation
Translation
“The Lord is the master of the potencies, and the living entity is the servant of them. That is the difference between the Lord and the living entity. However, you declare that the Lord and the living entities are one and the same.
Word meanings
māyā - adhīśa — the Lord of energy ; māyā - vaśa — subjected to the influence of māyā ; īśvare — in the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; jīve — in the living entities ; bheda — the difference ; hena - jīve — such living entities ; īśvara - saha — with the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kaha — you say ; ta’ — indeed ; abheda — one and the same .
Purport
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is by nature the master of all potencies. By nature, the living entities, being infinitesimal, are always under the influence of the Lord’s potencies. According to the Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad (3.1.1-2):
dvā suparṇā sayujā sakhāyā samānaṁ vṛkṣaṁ pariṣasvajāte tayor anyaḥ pippalaṁ svādv atty anaśnann anyo ’bhicākaśīti
samāne vṛkṣe puruṣo nimagno ’nīśayā śocati muhyamānaḥ juṣṭaṁ yadā paśyaty anyam īśam asya mahimānam eti vīta-śokaḥ
The Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad completely distinguishes the Lord from the living entities. The living entity is subjected to the reactions of fruitive activity, whereas the Lord simply witnesses such activity and bestows the results. According to the living entity’s desires, he is wandering from one body to another and from one planet to another, under the direction of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Paramātmā. However, when the living entity comes to his senses by the mercy of the Lord, he is awarded devotional service. Thus he is saved from the clutches of māyā. At such a time he can see his eternal friend, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and become free from all lamentation and hankering. This is confirmed in the Bhagavad-gītā (18.54) , where the Lord says, brahma-bhūtaḥ prasannātmā na śocati na kāṅkṣati: “One who is thus transcendentally situated at once realizes the Supreme Brahman and becomes fully joyful. He never laments or desires to have anything.” Thus it is definitely proved that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the master of all potencies and that the living entities are always subjected to these potencies. That is the difference between māyādhīśa and māyā-vaśa.
Madhya-lila 6.163
Sourceগীতাশাস্ত্রে জীবরূপ ‘শক্তি’ করি’ মানে । হেন জীবে ‘ভেদ’ কর ঈশ্বরের সনে ॥ ১৬৩ ॥
gītā-śāstre jīva-rūpa ‘śakti’ kari’ māne hena jīve ‘bheda’ kara īśvarera sane
English translation
Translation
“In the Bhagavad-gītā the living entity is established as the marginal potency of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Yet you say that the living entity is completely different from the Lord.
Word meanings
gītā - śāstre — in the Bhagavad-gītā ; jīva - rūpa — the identity of the living entity ; śakti — potency ; kari’ — making ; māne — accepts ; hena — such ; jīve — living entity ; bheda — different ; kara — you make ; īśvarera — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; sane — with .
Purport
The Brahma-sūtra states that according to the principle of śakti-śaktimator abhedaḥ, the living entity is simultaneously one with and different from the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Qualitatively the living entity and the Supreme Lord are one, but in quantity they are different. According to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s philosophy of acintya-bhedābheda-tattva, the living entity and the Supreme Lord are accepted as one and different at the same time.
Madhya-lila 6.164
Sourceভূমিরাপোঽনলো বায়ুঃ খং মনো বুদ্ধিরেব চ । অহঙ্কার ইতীয়ং মে ভিন্না প্রকৃতিরষ্টধা ॥ ১৬৪ ॥
bhūmir āpo ’nalo vāyuḥ khaṁ mano buddhir eva ca ahaṅkāra itīyaṁ me bhinnā prakṛtir aṣṭadhā
English translation
Translation
“ ‘Earth, water, fire, air, ether, mind, intelligence and false ego are My eightfold separated energies.
Word meanings
bhūmiḥ — earth ; āpaḥ — water ; analaḥ — fire ; vāyuḥ — air ; kham — ether ; manaḥ — mind ; buddhiḥ — intelligence ; eva — certainly ; ca — and ; ahaṅkāraḥ — false ego ; iti — thus ; iyam — this ; me — My ; bhinnā — separated ; prakṛtiḥ — energy ; aṣṭadhā — eightfold .
Madhya-lila 6.165
Sourceঅপরেয়মিতস্ত্বন্যাং প্ৰকৃতিং বিদ্ধি মে পরাম্ । জীবভূতাং মহাবাহো যয়েদং ধার্যতে জগৎ ॥ ১৬৫ ॥
apareyam itas tv anyāṁ prakṛtiṁ viddhi me parām jīva-bhūtāṁ mahā-bāho yayedaṁ dhāryate jagat
English translation
Translation
“ ‘Besides these inferior energies, which are material, there is another energy, a spiritual energy, and this is the living being, O mighty-armed one. The entire material world is sustained by the living entities.’
Word meanings
aparā — inferior ; iyam — this ; itaḥ — from this ; tu — but ; anyām — another ; prakṛtim — nature ; viddhi — know ; me — My ; parām — transcendental ; jīva - bhūtām — existing as the living entities ; mahā - bāho — O mighty-armed one ; yayā — by which ; idam — this ; dhāryate — is sustained ; jagat — material world .
Purport
Verses 164 and 165 are quotations from the Bhagavad-gītā (7.4-5).
Madhya-lila 6.166
Sourceঈশ্বরের শ্রীবিগ্রহ সচ্চিদানন্দাকার । সে-বিগ্রহে কহ সত্ত্বগুণের বিকার ॥ ১৬৬ ॥
īśvarera śrī-vigraha sac-cid-ānandākāra se-vigrahe kaha sattva-guṇera vikāra
English translation
Translation
“The transcendental form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is complete in eternity, cognizance and bliss. However, you describe this transcendental form as a product of material goodness.
Word meanings
īśvarera — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; śrī - vigraha — the form ; sat - cit - ānanda - ākāra — complete in eternity, cognizance and bliss ; se - vigrahe — about that form of the Lord ; kaha — you say ; sattva - guṇera — of the quality of material goodness ; vikāra — transformation .
Madhya-lila 6.167
Sourceশ্রীবিগ্রহ যে না মানে, সেই ত’ পাষণ্ডী । অদৃশ্য অস্পৃশ্য, সেই হয় যমদণ্ডী ॥ ১৬৭ ॥
śrī-vigraha ye nā māne, sei ta’ pāṣaṇḍī adṛśya aspṛśya, sei haya yama-daṇḍī
English translation
Translation
“One who does not accept the transcendental form of the Lord is certainly an agnostic. Such a person should be neither seen nor touched. Indeed, he is subject to be punished by Yamarāja.
Word meanings
śrī - vigraha — the form of the Lord ; ye — anyone who ; nā — not ; māne — accepts ; sei — he ; ta’ — indeed ; pāṣaṇḍī — agnostic ; adṛśya — not to be seen ; aspṛśya — untouchable ; sei — he ; haya — is ; yama - daṇḍī — subject to be punished by Yamarāja .
Purport
According to the Vedic instructions, the Supreme Personality of Godhead has His eternal, transcendental form, which is always blissful and full of knowledge. Impersonalists think that “material” refers to the forms within our experience and that “spiritual” refers to an absence of form. However, one should know that beyond this material nature is another nature, which is spiritual. Just as there are material forms in this material world, there are spiritual forms in the spiritual world. This is confirmed by all Vedic literature. The spiritual forms in the transcendental world have nothing to do with the negative conception of formlessness. The conclusion is that a person is an agnostic when he does not agree to worship the transcendental form of the Lord.
Actually, at the present moment all systems of religion deny the worship of the form of the Lord due to ignorance of His transcendental form. The first-class materialists (the Māyāvādīs) imagine five specific forms of the Lord, but when they try to equate the worship of such imaginary forms with bhakti, they are immediately condemned. Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa confirms this in the Bhagavad-gītā (7.15) , where He says, na māṁ duṣkṛtino mūḍhāḥ prapadyante narādhamāḥ. Bereft of real knowledge due to agnosticism, the Māyāvādī philosophers should not even be seen by the devotees of the Lord, nor touched, because those philosophers are liable to be punished by Yamarāja, the superintendent demigod who judges the activities of sinful men. The Māyāvādī agnostics wander within this universe in different species of life due to their nondevotional activities. Such living entities are subjected to the punishments of Yamarāja. Only the devotees, who are always engaged in the service of the Lord, are exempt from the jurisdiction of Yamarāja.
Madhya-lila 6.168
Sourceবেদ না মানিয়া বৌদ্ধ হয় ত’ নাস্তিক । বেদাশ্রয় নাস্তিক্য-বাদ বৌদ্ধকে অধিক ॥ ১৬৮ ॥
veda nā māniyā bauddha haya ta’ nāstika vedāśraya nāstikya-vāda bauddhake adhika
English translation
Translation
“The Buddhists do not recognize the authority of the Vedas; therefore they are considered agnostics. However, those who have taken shelter of the Vedic scriptures yet preach agnosticism in accordance with the Māyāvāda philosophy are certainly more dangerous than the Buddhists.
Word meanings
veda — the Vedic literature ; nā — not ; māniyā — accepting ; bauddha — the Buddhists ; haya — are ; ta’ — indeed ; nāstika — agnostics ; veda - āśraya — taking shelter of Vedic civilization ; nāstikya - vāda — agnosticism ; bauddhake — even Buddhists ; adhika — surpassing .
Purport
Although the Buddhists are directly opposed to Vaiṣṇava philosophy, it can easily be understood that the Śaṅkarites are more dangerous because they accept the authority of the Vedas yet act contrary to Vedic instruction. Vedāśraya nāstikya-vāda means “agnosticism under the shelter of Vedic culture” and refers to the monistic philosophy of the Māyāvādīs. Lord Buddha abandoned the authority of the Vedic literature and therefore rejected the ritualistic ceremonies and sacrifices recommended in the Vedas. His nirvāṇa philosophy means stopping all material activities. Lord Buddha did not recognize the presence of transcendental forms and spiritual activities beyond the material world. He simply described voidism beyond this material existence. The Māyāvādī philosophers offer lip service to Vedic authority but try to escape the Vedic ritualistic ceremonies. They concoct some idea of a transcendental position and call themselves Nārāyaṇa, or God. However, God’s position is completely different from their concoction. Such Māyāvādī philosophers consider themselves above the influence of karma-kāṇḍa (fruitive activities and their reactions). For them, the spiritual world is equated with the Buddhist voidism. There is very little difference between impersonalism and voidism. Voidism can be directly understood, but the impersonalism enunciated by Māyāvādī philosophers is not very easily understandable. Of course, Māyāvādī philosophers accept a spiritual existence, but they do not know about the spiritual world and spiritual beings. According to Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.2.32) :
ye ’nye ’ravindākṣa vimukta-māninas tvayy asta-bhāvād aviśuddha-buddhayaḥ āruhya kṛcchreṇa paraṁ padaṁ tataḥ patanty adho ’nādṛta-yuṣmad-aṅghrayaḥ
The intelligence of the Māyāvādīs is not purified; therefore even though they practice austerities for self-realization, they cannot remain within the impersonal brahmajyoti. Consequently, they fall down again into this material world.
The Māyāvādīs’ conception of spiritual existence is almost identical to the negation of material existence. The Māyāvādīs believe that there is nothing positive in spiritual life. As a result, they cannot understand devotional service or the worship of the Supreme Person, sac-cid-ānanda-vigraha. The Māyāvādī philosophers consider Deity worship in devotional service to be pratibimba-vāda, or the worship of a form that is the reflection of a false material form. Thus the Lord’s transcendental form, which is eternally blissful and full of knowledge, is unknown to Māyāvādī philosophers. Although the term “Bhagavān” is explicitly described in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, they cannot understand it. Brahmeti paramātmeti bhagavān iti śabdyate: “The Absolute Truth is called Brahman, Paramātmā and Bhagavān.” ( Bhāg. 1.2.11 ) The Māyāvādīs try to understand Brahman only, or, at the most, Paramātmā. However, they are unable to understand Bhagavān. Therefore the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, says, māyayāpahṛta-jñānāḥ. Because of the temperament of the Māyāvādī philosophers, real knowledge is taken from them. Because they cannot receive the mercy of the Lord, they will always be bewildered by His transcendental form. Impersonal philosophy destroys the three phases of knowledge — jñāna, jñeya and jñātā. As soon as one speaks of knowledge, there must be a person who is the knower, the knowledge itself and the object of knowledge. Māyāvāda philosophy combines these three categories; therefore the Māyāvādīs cannot understand how the spiritual potencies of the Supreme Personality of Godhead act. Because of their poor fund of knowledge, they cannot understand the distinction in the spiritual world between knowledge, the knower and the object of knowledge. Because of this, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu considers the Māyāvādī philosophers more dangerous than the Buddhists.
Madhya-lila 6.169
Sourceজীবের নিস্তার লাগি’ সূত্র কৈল ব্যাস । মায়াবাদি-ভাষ্য শুনিলে হয় সর্বনাশ ॥ ১৬৯ ॥
jīvera nistāra lāgi’ sūtra kaila vyāsa māyāvādi-bhāṣya śunile haya sarva-nāśa
English translation
Translation
“Śrīla Vyāsadeva presented the Vedānta philosophy for the deliverance of conditioned souls, but if one hears the commentary of Śaṅkarācārya, everything is spoiled.
Word meanings
jīvera — of the living entities ; nistāra — deliverance ; lāgi’ — for the matter of ; sūtra — the Vedānta-sūtra ; kaila — made ; vyāsa — Śrīla Vyāsadeva ; māyāvādi — of the impersonalists ; bhāṣya — commentary ; śunile — if hearing ; haya — becomes ; sarva - nāśa — all destruction .
Purport
Factually, the devotional service of the Lord is described in the Vedānta-sūtra, but the Māyāvādī philosophers, the Śaṅkarites, prepared a commentary known as Śārīraka-bhāṣya, in which the transcendental form of the Lord is denied. The Māyāvādī philosophers think that the living entity is identical with the Supreme Soul, Brahman. Their commentaries on the Vedānta-sūtra are completely opposed to the principle of devotional service. Caitanya Mahāprabhu therefore warns us to avoid these commentaries. If one indulges in hearing the Śaṅkarite Śārīraka-bhāṣya, he will certainly be bereft of all real knowledge.
The ambitious Māyāvādī philosophers desire to merge into the existence of the Lord, and this may be accepted as sāyujya-mukti. However, this form of mukti means denying one’s individual existence. In other words, it is a kind of spiritual suicide. This is absolutely opposed to the philosophy of bhakti-yoga. Bhakti-yoga offers immortality to the individual conditioned soul. If one follows the Māyāvādī philosophy, he misses his opportunity to become immortal after giving up the material body. The immortality of the individual person is the highest perfectional stage a living entity can attain.
Madhya-lila 6.170
Source‘পরিণাম-বাদ’ — ব্যাস-সূত্রের সম্মত । অচিন্ত্যশক্তি ঈশ্বর জগদ্রূপে পরিণত ॥ ১৭০ ॥
‘pariṇāma-vāda’ — vyāsa-sūtrera sammata acintya-śakti īśvara jagad-rūpe pariṇata
English translation
Translation
“The Vedānta-sūtra aims at establishing that the cosmic manifestation has come into being by the transformation of the inconceivable potency of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Word meanings
pariṇāma - vāda — the theory of transformation ; vyāsa - sūtrera — of the Vedānta-sūtra ; sammata — purpose ; acintya - śakti — inconceivable power ; īśvara — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; jagat - rūpe — in the form of the cosmic manifestation ; pariṇata — transformed .
Purport
For a further explanation of pariṇāma-vāda, refer to Ādi-līlā, seventh chapter, verses 121-133.
Madhya-lila 6.171
Sourceমণি যৈছে অবিকৃতে প্রসবে হেমভার । জগদ্রূপ হয় ঈশ্বর, তবু অবিকার ॥ ১৭১ ॥
maṇi yaiche avikṛte prasabe hema-bhāra jagad-rūpa haya īśvara, tabu avikāra
English translation
Translation
“The touchstone, after touching iron, produces volumes of gold without being changed. Similarly, the Supreme Personality of Godhead manifests Himself as the cosmic manifestation by His inconceivable potency, yet He remains unchanged in His eternal, transcendental form.
Word meanings
maṇi — the touchstone ; yaiche — just as ; avikṛte — without being transformed ; prasabe — produces ; hema - bhāra — volumes of gold ; jagat - rūpa — the cosmic manifestation ; haya — becomes ; īśvara — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tabu — still ; avikāra — unchanged .
Purport
According to the commentary of Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura, the purpose of the janmādy asya verse in the Vedānta-sūtra is to establish that the cosmic manifestation is the result of the transformation of the potencies of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Supreme Lord is the master of innumerable eternal energies, which are unlimited. Sometimes these energies are manifested, and sometimes they are not. In any case, all energies are under His control; therefore He is the original energetic, the abode of all energies. A common brain in the conditioned state cannot conceive of how these inconceivable energies abide in the Supreme Personality of Godhead, how He exists in His innumerable forms as the master of both spiritual and material energies, how He is the master of both manifest and potential powers, and how contradictory potencies can abide in Him. As long as the living entity is within this material world, in the condition of illusion, he cannot understand the activities of the inconceivable energies of the Lord. Thus the Lord’s energies, though factual, are simply beyond the power of the common brain to understand.
When the atheistic philosophers or the Māyāvādīs, being unable to understand the inconceivable energies of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, imagine an impersonal void, their imagination is only the counterpart of materialistic thinking. Within the material world, there is nothing inconceivable. High-thinking philosophers and scientists can tackle the material energy, but not being able to understand the spiritual energy, they can simply imagine an inactive state, such as the impersonal Brahman. This is simply the negative side of material life. By such imperfect knowledge, the Māyāvādī philosophers conclude that the cosmic manifestation is a transformation of the Supreme. Thus they must necessarily also accept the theory of the illusion of the Supreme ( vivarta-vāda ) . However, if we accept the inconceivable potencies of the Lord, we can understand how the Supreme Personality of Godhead can appear within this material world without being touched or contaminated by the three modes of material nature.
From the śāstras we learn that there is a stone or jewel called a touchstone that can transform iron into gold. Although the touchstone turns iron into gold many times, it remains in its original condition. If such a material stone can maintain its inconceivable energy after producing volumes of gold, certainly the Supreme Personality of Godhead can remain in His original sac-cid-ānanda form after creating the cosmic world. As confirmed in the Bhagavad-gītā (9.10) , He acts only through His different energies. Mayādhyakṣeṇa prakṛtiḥ: Kṛṣṇa directs the material energy, and that potency works in this material world. This is also confirmed in the Brahma-saṁhitā (5.44) :
sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralaya-sādhana-śaktir ekā chāyeva yasya bhuvanāni bibharti durgā icchānurūpam api yasya ca ceṣṭate sā govindam ādi-puruṣaṁ tam ahaṁ bhajāmi
The durgā-śakti (material energy) acts under the direction of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and the universal creation, maintenance and destruction are being carried out by the durgā-śakti. Kṛṣṇa’s direction is in the background. The conclusion is that the Supreme Personality of Godhead remains as He is, even though directing His energy, which makes the diverse cosmic manifestation work so wonderfully.
Madhya-lila 6.172
Sourceব্যাস — ভ্রান্ত বলি’ সেই সূত্রে দোষ দিয়া । ‘বিবর্তবাদ’ স্থাপিয়াছে কল্পনা করিয়া ॥ ১৭২ ॥
vyāsa — bhrānta bali’ sei sūtre doṣa diyā ‘vivarta-vāda’ sthāpiyāche kalpanā kariyā
English translation
Translation
“Śaṅkarācārya states that the theory of transformation presented in the Vedānta-sūtra implies that the Absolute Truth itself is transformed. In this way the Māyāvādī philosophers denigrate Śrīla Vyāsadeva by accusing him of error. They thus find fault in the Vedānta-sūtra and misinterpret it to try to establish the theory of illusion.
Word meanings
vyāsa — Śrīla Vyāsadeva ; bhrānta — mistaken ; bali’ — saying ; sei — that ; sūtre — in the Vedānta-sūtra ; doṣa — fault ; diyā — accusing ; vivarta - vāda — the theory of illusion ; sthāpiyāche — has established ; kalpanā — imagination ; kariyā — doing .
Purport
The first verse of the Brahma-sūtra is athāto brahma-jijñāsā: “We must now inquire into the Absolute Truth.” The second verse immediately answers, janmādy asya yataḥ: “The Absolute Truth is the original source of everything.” Janmādy asya yataḥ does not suggest that the original person has been transformed. Rather, it clearly indicates that He produces this cosmic manifestation through His inconceivable energy. This is also clearly explained in the Bhagavad-gītā (10.8) , where Kṛṣṇa says, mattaḥ sarvaṁ pravartate: “From Me, everything emanates.” This is also confirmed in the Taittirīya Upaniṣad (3.1.1): yato vā imāni bhūtāni jāyante. “The Supreme Absolute Truth is that from which everything is born.” Similarly, in the Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad (1.1.7) it is stated, yathorṇa-nābhiḥ sṛjate gṛhṇate ca: “[The Lord creates and destroys the cosmic manifestation] as a spider creates a web and draws it back within itself.” All of these śāstric statements indicate the transformation of the Lord’s energy, not of the Lord Himself. Tranformation of the Lord’s energy is called pariṇāma-vāda. However, being very anxious to protect Śrīla Vyāsadeva from criticism, Śaṅkarācārya became a pseudo gentleman and put forward his theory of illusion ( vivarta-vāda ) . Śaṅkarācārya concocted this meaning of pariṇāma-vāda, and by word jugglery he endeavored very hard to establish pariṇāma-vāda as vivarta-vāda.
Madhya-lila 6.173
Sourceজীবের দেহে আত্মবুদ্ধি — সেই মিথ্যা হয় । জগৎ যে মিথ্যা নহে, নশ্বরমাত্র হয় ॥ ১৭৩ ॥
jīvera dehe ātma-buddhi — sei mithyā haya jagat ye mithyā nahe, naśvara-mātra haya
English translation
Translation
“The theory of illusion can be applied only when the living entity identifies himself with the body. As far as the cosmic manifestation is concerned, it cannot be called false, although it is certainly temporary.
Word meanings
jīvera — of the living entities ; dehe — in the body ; ātma - buddhi — considering as the self ; sei — that ; mithyā — untruth ; haya — is ; jagat — the cosmic manifestation ; ye — that ; mithyā — untruth ; nahe — not ; naśvara - mātra — only temporary ; haya — is .
Purport
The living entity is the eternal servant of Kṛṣṇa. Being part and parcel of the Lord, he is constitutionally pure, but due to his contact with material energy, he identifies himself with either the gross or the subtle material body. Such identification is certainly false and constitutes the genuine platform of the theory of illusion. The living entity is eternal: he can never be subjected to the limits of time, as are his gross and subtle bodies. The cosmic manifestation is never false, but it is subject to change by the influence of the time factor. For a living entity to accept this cosmic manifestation as the field for his sense enjoyment is certainly illusory. This material world is the manifestation of the material energy of the Lord. This is explained by Kṛṣṇa in the Bhagavad-gītā (7.4) :
bhūmir āpo ’nalo vāyuḥ khaṁ mano buddhir eva ca ahaṅkāra itīyaṁ me bhinnā prakṛtir aṣṭadhā
“Earth, water, fire, air, ether, mind, intelligence and false ego — all together these eight constitute My separated material energies.”
The material world is the inferior energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but it is not a fact that the Supreme Lord has been transformed into this material world. The Māyāvādī philosophers, devoid of true understanding, have confused the theory of illusion and the theory of the cosmic manifestation by word jugglery. The theory of illusion can be applied to a person who identifies himself with the body. The living entity is the superior energy of the Supreme Lord, and the material world is the inferior energy. Both, however, are prakṛti (energy). Although the energies are simultaneously one with the Lord and different from Him, the Lord never loses His personal form due to the transformation of His different energies.
Madhya-lila 6.174
Source‘প্রণব’ যে মহাবাক্য — ঈশ্বরের মূর্তি । প্রণব হৈতে সর্ববেদ, জগৎ-উৎপত্তি ॥ ১৭৪ ॥
‘praṇava’ ye mahā-vākya — īśvarera mūrti praṇava haite sarva-veda, jagat-utpatti
English translation
Translation
“The transcendental vibration oṁkāra is the sound form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. All Vedic knowledge and this cosmic manifestation are produced from this sound representation of the Supreme Lord.
Word meanings
praṇava — oṁkāra ; ye — that which ; mahā - vākya — transcendental vibration ; īśvarera — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; mūrti — the form ; praṇava — oṁkāra ; haite — from ; sarva - veda — all Vedic literature ; jagat — of the material world ; utpatti — production .
Purport
Oṁkāra is the representation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in sound. This form of His holy name is accepted as the transcendental vibration ( mahā-vākya ) by virtue of which the temporary material manifestation has come into being. If one takes shelter of the sound representation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ( oṁkāra ), he can realize his constitutional identity and engage in devotional service even though in conditioned life.
Madhya-lila 6.175
Source‘তত্ত্বমসি’ — জীব-হেতু প্রাদেশিক বাক্য । প্রণব না মানি’ তারে কহে মহাবাক্য ॥” ১৭৫ ॥
‘tat tvam asi’ — jīva-hetu prādeśika vākya praṇava nā māni’ tāre kahe mahā-vākya
English translation
Translation
“The subsidiary vibration tat tvam asi [“you are the same”] is meant for the understanding of the living entity, but the principal vibration is oṁkāra. Not caring for oṁkāra, Śaṅkarācārya has stressed the vibration tat tvam asi.”
Word meanings
tat tvam asi — you are the same ; jīva - hetu — for the enlightenment of the conditioned soul ; prādeśika — subsidiary ; vākya — vibration ; praṇava — the oṁkāra incarnation ; nā — not ; māni’ — accepting ; tāre — that ; kahe — says ; mahā - vākya — transcendental vibration .
Purport
Tat tvam asi is accepted as the primary vibration by one who does not accept praṇava, the transcendental sound incarnation of the holy name of the Lord, as the chief principle in the Vedic literature. By word jugglery, Śaṅkarācārya tried to create an illusory presentation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in His relationship with the living entities and the cosmic manifestation. Tat tvam asi is a warning to the living entity not to mistake the body for the self. Therefore tat tvam asi is especially meant for the conditioned soul. The chanting of oṁkāra or the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra is meant for the liberated soul. Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī has said, ayi mukta-kulair upāsyamānam ( Nāmāṣṭaka 1). Thus the holy name of the Lord is chanted by the liberated souls. Similarly, Parīkṣit Mahārāja says, nivṛtta-tarṣair upagīyamānāt ( Bhāg. 10.1.4 ). The holy name of the Lord can be chanted by those who have fully satisfied their material desires or who are fully situated on the transcendental platform and devoid of material desire. The name of the Lord can be chanted by one who is completely freed from material contamination ( anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyaṁ jñāna-karmādy-anāvṛtam ) . Śaṅkarācārya has indirectly minimized the value of the principal Vedic mantra ( oṁkāra ) by accepting a subordinate vibration ( tat tvam asi ) as the most important Vedic mantra.
Madhya-lila 6.176
Sourceএইমতে কল্পিত ভাষ্যে শত দোষ দিল । ভট্টাচার্য পূর্বপক্ষ অপার করিল ॥ ১৭৬ ॥
ei-mate kalpita bhāṣye śata doṣa dila bhaṭṭācārya pūrva-pakṣa apāra karila
English translation
Translation
Thus Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu criticized Śaṅkarācārya’s Śārīraka-bhāṣya as imaginary, and He pointed out hundreds of faults in it. To defend Śaṅkarācārya, however, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya presented unlimited opposition.
Word meanings
ei - mate — in this way ; kalpita — imagined ; bhāṣye — in the commentary ; śata — hundreds ; doṣa — of faults ; dila — gave ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; pūrva - pakṣa — opposing elements ; apāra — unlimitedly ; karila — manifested .
Madhya-lila 6.177
Sourceবিতণ্ডা, ছল, নিগ্রহাদি অনেক উঠাইল । সব খণ্ডি’ প্রভু নিজ-মত সে স্থাপিল ॥ ১৭৭ ॥
vitaṇḍā, chala, nigrahādi aneka uṭhāila saba khaṇḍi’ prabhu nija-mata se sthāpila
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya presented various types of false arguments with pseudo logic and tried to defeat his opponent in many ways. However, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu refuted all these arguments and established His own conviction.
Word meanings
vitaṇḍā — counterarguments ; chala — imaginary interpretations ; nigraha - ādi — repulses to the opposite party ; aneka — various ; uṭhāila — raised ; saba — all ; khaṇḍi’ — refuting ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nija - mata — His own conviction ; se — that ; sthāpila — established .
Purport
The word vitaṇḍā indicates that a debater, not touching the main point or establishing his own point, simply tries to refute the other person’s argument. When one does not touch the direct meaning but tries to divert attention by misinterpretation, he engages in chala. The word nigraha also means always trying to refute the arguments of the other party.
Madhya-lila 6.178
Source“ভগবান্ — ‘সম্বন্ধ’, ভক্তি — ‘অভিধেয়’ হয় । প্রেমা — ‘প্রয়োজন’, বেদে তিনবস্তু কয় ॥ ১৭৮ ॥
bhagavān — ‘sambandha’, bhakti — ‘abhidheya’ haya premā — ‘prayojana’, vede tina-vastu kaya
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the central point of all relationships, acting in devotional service to Him is one’s real occupation, and the attainment of love of Godhead is the ultimate goal of life. These three subject matters are described in the Vedic literature.
Word meanings
bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; sambandha — relationship ; bhakti — devotional service ; abhidheya — transcendental activities ; haya — is ; premā — love of Godhead ; prayojana — the ultimate goal of life ; vede — the Vedas ; tina - vastu — three subject matters ; kaya — describe .
Purport
In the Bhagavad-gītā (15.15) Lord Kṛṣṇa confirms this statement: vedaiś ca sarvair aham eva vedyaḥ. The actual purpose in reading the Vedas is to learn how to become a devotee of the Supreme Lord. The Lord Himself advises, man-manā bhava mad-bhakto mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru ( Bg. 9.34 ). Therefore, after studying the Vedas, one must then execute devotional service by thinking always of the Supreme Lord ( man-manā ), becoming His devotee, worshiping Him and always offering Him obeisances. This is called viṣṇu-ārādhana, and it is the supreme occupational duty of all human beings. It is properly discharged in the varṇāśrama-dharma system, which divides society into brahmacarya, gṛhastha, vānaprastha and sannyāsa and brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, vaiśya and śūdra. This is the whole scheme of Vedic civilization. However, this institution is very difficult to establish in this age; therefore Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu advises that we not worry about the Vedic system of varṇāśrama-dharma. Rather, we should take directly to the chanting of the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra and simply hear about the Supreme Personality of Godhead from pure devotees. This is the process recommended by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, and this is the purpose for studying the Vedas.
Madhya-lila 6.179
Sourceআর যে যে-কিছু কহে, সকলই কল্পনা । স্বতঃপ্রমাণ বেদ-বাক্যে কল্পেন লক্ষণা ॥ ১৭৯ ॥
āra ye ye-kichu kahe, sakala-i kalpanā svataḥ-pramāṇa veda-vākye kalpena lakṣaṇā
English translation
Translation
“If one tries to explain the Vedic literature in a different way, he is indulging in imagination. Any interpretation of the self-evident Vedic version is simply imaginary.
Word meanings
āra — except this ; ye ye — whatever ; kichu — something ; kahe — says ; sakala - i — all ; kalpanā — imagination ; svataḥ - pramāṇa — self-evident ; veda - vākye — in the Vedic version ; kalpena — he imagines ; lakṣaṇā — an interpretation .
Purport
When a conditioned soul is purified, he is called a devotee. A devotee has his relationship only with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and his only occupational duty is to execute devotional service to satisfy the Lord. This service is rendered through the Lord’s representative, the spiritual master: yasya deve parā bhaktir yathā deve tathā gurau. When the devotee executes devotional service properly, he attains the highest perfection of life — love of Godhead: sa vai puṁsāṁ paro dharmo yato bhaktir adhokṣaje. The ultimate goal of understanding the Vedas is to be elevated to the platform of rendering loving service to the Lord. The Māyāvādī philosophers, however, consider the central point of relationship to be the impersonal Brahman, the function of the living entity to be the acquisition of knowledge of Brahman, resulting in detachment from material activity, and the ultimate goal of life to be liberation, or merging into the existence of the Supreme. All of this, however, is simply due to the imagination of the conditioned soul. It simply opposes him to material activities. One should always remember that all Vedic literatures are self-evident. No one is allowed to interpret the Vedic verses. If one does so, he indulges in imagination, and that has no value.
Madhya-lila 6.180
Sourceআচার্যের দোষ নাহি, ঈশ্বর-আজ্ঞা হৈল । অতএব কল্পনা করি’ নাস্তিক-শাস্ত্র কৈল ॥ ১৮০ ॥
ācāryera doṣa nāhi, īśvara-ājñā haila ataeva kalpanā kari’ nāstika-śāstra kaila
English translation
Translation
“Actually there is no fault on the part of Śaṅkarācārya. He simply carried out the order of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He had to imagine some kind of interpretation, and therefore he presented a kind of Vedic literature that is full of atheism.
Word meanings
ācāryera — of Śaṅkarācārya ; doṣa — fault ; nāhi — there is not ; īśvara - ājñā — the order of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; haila — there was ; ataeva — therefore ; kalpanā — imagination ; kari’ — making ; nāstika — atheistic ; śāstra — scriptures ; kaila — prepared .
Madhya-lila 6.181
Sourceস্বাগমৈঃ কল্পিতৈস্ত্বঞ্চ জনান্ মদ্বিমুখান্ কুরু । মাঞ্চ গোপয় যেন স্যাৎ সৃষ্টিরেষোত্তরোত্তরা ॥ ১৮১ ॥
svāgamaiḥ kalpitais tvaṁ ca janān mad-vimukhān kuru māṁ ca gopaya yena syāt sṛṣṭir eṣottarottarā
English translation
Translation
“[Addressing Lord Śiva, the Supreme Personality of Godhead said:] ‘Please make the general populace averse to Me by imagining your own interpretation of the Vedas. Also, cover Me in such a way that people will take more interest in advancing material civilization just to propagate a population bereft of spiritual knowledge.’
Word meanings
sva - āgamaiḥ — with your own theses ; kalpitaiḥ — imagined ; tvam — you ; ca — also ; janān — the people in general ; mat - vimukhān — averse to Me and addicted to fruitive activities and speculative knowledge ; kuru — make ; mām — Me, the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; ca — and ; gopaya — just cover ; yena — by which ; syāt — there may be ; sṛṣṭiḥ — material advancement ; eṣā — this ; uttara - uttarā — more and more .
Purport
This is a quotation from the Padma Purāṇa, Uttara-khaṇḍa (62.31).
Madhya-lila 6.182
Sourceমায়াবাদমসচ্ছাস্ত্রং প্ৰচ্ছন্নং বৌদ্ধমুচ্যতে । ময়ৈব বিহিতং দেবি কলৌ ব্রাহ্মণমূর্তিনা ॥” ১৮২ ॥
māyāvādam asac-chāstraṁ pracchannaṁ bauddham ucyate mayaiva vihitaṁ devi kalau brāhmaṇa-mūrtinā
English translation
Translation
“[Lord Śiva informed goddess Durgā, the superintendent of the material world:] ‘In the Age of Kali I take the form of a brāhmaṇa and explain the Vedas through false scriptures in an atheistic way, similar to Buddhist philosophy.’ ”
Word meanings
māyāvādam — the philosophy of Māyāvāda ; asat - śāstram — false scriptures ; pracchannam — covered ; bauddham — Buddhism ; ucyate — it is said ; mayā — by me ; eva — only ; vihitam — taught ; devi — O goddess of the material world ; kalau — in the Age of Kali ; brāhmaṇa - mūrtinā — having the body of a brāhmaṇa. .
Purport
The word brāhmaṇa-mūrtinā in this verse-refers to the founder of Māyāvāda philosophy, Śaṅkarācārya, who was born in the Mālabara district of southern India. Māyāvāda philosophy states that the Supreme Lord, the living entities and the cosmic manifestation are all transformations of illusory energy. To support this atheistic theory, the Māyāvādīs cite false scriptures, which make people bereft of transcendental knowledge and addicted to fruitive activities and mental speculation.
This verse is a quotation from the Padma Purāṇa, Uttara-khaṇḍa (25.7).
Madhya-lila 6.183
Sourceশুনি’ ভট্টাচার্য হৈল পরম বিস্মিত । মুখে না নিঃসরে বাণী, হইলা স্তম্ভিত ॥ ১৮৩ ॥
śuni’ bhaṭṭācārya haila parama vismita mukhe nā niḥsare vāṇī, ha-ilā stambhita
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya became very much astonished upon hearing this. He became stunned and said nothing.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; haila — became ; parama — very much ; vismita — astonished ; mukhe — in the mouth ; nā — not ; niḥsare — vibrates ; vāṇī — words ; ha - ilā — became ; stambhita — stunned .
Madhya-lila 6.184
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, — “ভট্টাচার্য, না কর বিস্ময় । ভগবানে ভক্তি — পরম-পুরুষার্থ হয় ॥ ১৮৪ ॥
prabhu kahe, — bhaṭṭācārya, nā kara vismaya bhagavāne bhakti — parama-puruṣārtha haya
English translation
Translation
Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu then told him, “Do not be astonished. Actually, devotional service unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the highest perfection of human activity.
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord said ; bhaṭṭācārya — My dear Bhaṭṭācārya ; nā — not ; kara — do ; vismaya — astonishment ; bhagavāne — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; bhakti — devotional service ; parama — the supreme ; puruṣa - artha — human interest ; haya — is .
Madhya-lila 6.185
Source‘আত্মারাম’ পর্যন্ত করে ঈশ্বর ভজন । ঐছে অচিন্ত্য ভগবানের গুণগণ ॥ ১৮৫ ॥
‘ātmārāma’ paryanta kare īśvara bhajana aiche acintya bhagavānera guṇa-gaṇa
English translation
Translation
“Even the self-satisfied sages perform devotional service to the Supreme Lord. Such are the transcendental qualities of the Lord. They are full of inconceivable spiritual potency.
Word meanings
ātma - ārāma — self-satisfied ; paryanta — up to ; kare — do ; īśvara bhajana — devotional service to the Lord ; aiche — such ; acintya — inconceivable ; bhagavānera — of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; guṇa - gaṇa — transcendental qualities .
Madhya-lila 6.186
Sourceআত্মারামাশ্চ মুনয়ো নির্গ্রন্থা অপ্যুরুক্রমে । কুর্বন্ত্যহৈতুকীং ভক্তিমিত্থম্ভূতগুণো হরিঃ ॥” ১৮৬ ॥
ātmārāmāś ca munayo nirgranthā apy urukrame kurvanty ahaitukīṁ bhaktim ittham-bhūta-guṇo hariḥ
English translation
Translation
“ ‘Those who are self-satisfied and unattracted by external material desires are also attracted to the loving service of Śrī Kṛṣṇa, whose qualities are transcendental and whose activities are wonderful. Hari, the Personality of Godhead, is called Kṛṣṇa because He has such transcendentally attractive features.’ ”
Word meanings
ātma - ārāmāḥ — persons who take pleasure in being transcendentally situated in the service of the Lord ; ca — also ; munayaḥ — great saintly persons who have completely rejected material aspirations, fruitive activities and so forth ; nirgranthāḥ — without interest in any material desire ; api — certainly ; urukrame — unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, whose activities are wonderful ; kurvanti — do ; ahaitukīm — causeless, or without material desires ; bhaktim — devotional service ; ittham - bhūta — so wonderful as to attract the attention of the self-satisfied ; guṇaḥ — who has transcendental qualities ; hariḥ — the Supreme Personality of Godhead .
Purport
This is the famous ātmārāma verse ( Bhāg. 1.7.10 ).
Madhya-lila 6.187
Sourceশুনি’ ভট্টাচার্য কহে, — ‘শুন, মহাশয় । এই শ্লোকের অর্থ শুনিতে বাঞ্ছা হয় ॥’ ১৮৭ ॥
śuni’ bhaṭṭācārya kahe, — ‘śuna, mahāśaya ei ślokera artha śunite vāñchā haya’
English translation
Translation
After hearing the ātmārāma verse, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya addressed Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, “My dear Sir, please explain this verse. I have a great desire to hear Your explanation of it.”
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing this ; bhaṭṭācārya kahe — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said ; śuna — please hear ; mahā - āśaya — my dear Sir ; ei ślokera — of this verse ; artha — the meaning ; śunite — to hear ; vāñchā — a desire ; haya — there is .
Madhya-lila 6.188
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, — ‘তুমি কি অর্থ কর, তাহা আগে শুনি’ । পাছে আমি করিব অর্থ, যেবা কিছু জানি ॥’ ১৮৮ ॥
prabhu kahe, — ‘tumi ki artha kara, tāhā āge śuni’ pāche āmi kariba artha, yebā kichu jāni’
English translation
Translation
The Lord replied, “First let Me hear your explanation. After that, I shall try to explain what little I know.”
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord said ; tumi — you ; ki — what ; artha — meaning ; kara — do ; tāhā — that ; āge — first of all ; śuni’ — hearing ; pāche — after that ; āmi — I ; kariba — shall do ; artha — meaning ; yebā — whatever ; kichu — something ; jāni — I know .
Madhya-lila 6.189
Sourceশুনি’ ভট্টাচার্য শ্লোক করিল ব্যাখ্যান । তর্কশাস্ত্র-মত উঠায় বিবিধ বিধান ॥ ১৮৯ ॥
śuni’ bhaṭṭācārya śloka karila vyākhyāna tarka-śāstra-mata uṭhāya vividha vidhāna
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya then began to explain the ātmārāma verse, and according to the principles of logic, he put forward various propositions.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing this ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; śloka — of the verse ; karila — did ; vyākhyāna — explanation ; tarka - śāstra — scriptures dealing with logic ; mata — according to ; uṭhāya — raises ; vividha — various ; vidhāna — propositions .
Madhya-lila 6.190
Sourceনববিধ অর্থ কৈল শাস্ত্রমত লঞা । শুনি’ প্রভু কহে কিছু ঈষৎ হাসিয়া ॥ ১৯০ ॥
nava-vidha artha kaila śāstra-mata lañā śuni’ prabhu kahe kichu īṣat hāsiyā
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya explained the ātmārāma verse in nine different ways on the basis of scripture. After hearing his explanation, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, smiling a little, began to speak.
Word meanings
nava - vidha — nine kinds ; artha — meanings ; kaila — did ; śāstra - mata — the principles of authorized scriptures ; lañā — taking ; śuni’ — after hearing that ; prabhu — Lord Caitanya ; kahe — began to speak ; kichu — something ; īṣat — slightly ; hāsiyā — smiling .
Purport
The ātmārāma verse was discussed at Naimiṣāraṇya at a meeting of many great sages, headed by Śaunaka Ṛṣi. They questioned Śrīla Sūta Gosvāmī, who presided at the meeting, about why Śrīla Śukadeva Gosvāmī, a paramahaṁsa already in the transcendental position, was attracted to a discussion of the qualities of Kṛṣṇa. In other words, they wanted to know why Śrī Śukadeva Gosvāmī engaged in the study of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam.
Madhya-lila 6.191
Source“‘ভট্টাচার্য’, জানি — তুমি সাক্ষাৎ বৃহস্পতি । শাস্ত্রব্যাখ্যা করিতে ঐছে কারো নাহি শক্তি ॥ ১৯১ ॥
‘bhaṭṭācārya’, jāni — tumi sākṣāt bṛhaspati śāstra-vyākhyā karite aiche kāro nāhi śakti
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “My dear Bhaṭṭācārya, you are exactly like Bṛhaspati, the priest of the heavenly kingdom. Indeed, no one within this world has the power to explain the scriptures in such a way.
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya — My dear Bhaṭṭācārya ; jāni — I know ; tumi — you ; sākṣāt — directly ; bṛhaspati — the learned priest of the demigods named Bṛhaspati ; śāstra - vyākhyā — explanation of the scriptures ; karite — to do ; aiche — such ; kāro — of anyone else ; nāhi — there is not ; śakti — power .
Madhya-lila 6.192
Sourceকিন্তু তুমি অর্থ কৈলে পাণ্ডিত্য-প্রতিভায় । ইহা বই শ্লোকের আছে আরো অভিপ্রায় ॥” ১৯২ ॥
kintu tumi artha kaile pāṇḍitya-pratibhāya ihā va-i ślokera āche āro abhiprāya
English translation
Translation
“My dear Bhaṭṭācārya, you have certainly explained this verse by the prowess of your vast learning, but you should know that, besides this scholarly explanation, there is another purport to this verse.”
Word meanings
kintu — but ; tumi — you ; artha — meaning ; kaile — have shown ; pāṇḍitya — scholarly ; pratibhāya — with prowess ; ihā va - i — besides this ; ślokera — of the verse ; āche — there is ; āro — another ; abhiprāya — purport .
Madhya-lila 6.193
Sourceভট্টাচার্যের প্রার্থনাতে প্রভু ব্যাখ্যা কৈল । তাঁর নব অর্থ-মধ্যে এক না ছুইঁল ॥ ১৯৩ ॥
bhaṭṭācāryera prārthanāte prabhu vyākhyā kaila tāṅra nava artha-madhye eka nā chuṅila
English translation
Translation
Upon the request of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu began to explain the verse, without touching upon the nine explanations given by the Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; prārthanāte — on the request ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; vyākhyā — explanation ; kaila — made ; tāṅra — his ; nava artha — of the nine different types of explanations ; madhye — in the midst ; eka — one ; nā — not ; chuṅila — touched .
Madhya-lila 6.194
Sourceআত্মারামাশ্চ-শ্লোকে ‘একাদশ’ পদ হয় । পৃথক্ পৃথক্ কৈল পদের অর্থ নিশ্চয় ॥ ১৯৪ ॥
ātmārāmāś ca-śloke ‘ekādaśa’ pada haya pṛthak pṛthak kaila padera artha niścaya
English translation
Translation
There are eleven words in the ātmārāma verse, and Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu explained each word, one after the other.
Word meanings
ātmārāmāś ca — known as such ; śloke — in the verse ; ekādaśa — eleven ; pada — words ; haya — there are ; pṛthak pṛthak — separately one after another ; kaila — made ; padera — of the words ; artha — the meaning ; niścaya — certainty .
Purport
The words in the ātmārāma verse are ātmārāmāḥ, ca, munayaḥ, nirgranthāḥ, api, urukrame, kurvanti, ahaitukīm, bhaktim, ittham-bhūta-guṇaḥ and hariḥ .
Madhya-lila 6.195
Sourceতত্তৎপদ-প্রাধান্যে ‘আত্মারাম’ মিলাঞা । অষ্টাদশ অর্থ কৈল অভিপ্রায় লঞা ॥ ১৯৫ ॥
tat-tat-pada-prādhānye ‘ātmārāma’ milāñā aṣṭādaśa artha kaila abhiprāya lañā
English translation
Translation
Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu took each word specifically and combined it with the word “ātmārāma.” He thus explained the word “ātmārāma” in eighteen different ways.
Word meanings
tat - tat - pada — all those items ; prādhānye — principally ; ātmārāma — the word ātmārāma ; milāñā — causing to meet ; aṣṭādaśa — eighteen ; artha — meanings ; kaila — did ; abhiprāya — purpose ; lañā — accepting .
Madhya-lila 6.196
Source“ভগবান্, তাঁর শক্তি, তাঁর গুণগণ । অচিন্ত্য প্রভাব তিনের না যায় কথন ॥ ১৯৬ ॥
bhagavān, tāṅra śakti, tāṅra guṇa-gaṇa acintya prabhāva tinera nā yāya kathana
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “The Supreme Personality of Godhead, His different potencies and His transcendental qualities all have inconceivable prowess. It is not possible to explain them fully.
Word meanings
bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; tāṅra śakti — His potencies ; tāṅra guṇa - gaṇa — His transcendental qualities ; acintya — inconceivable ; prabhāva — the influence ; tinera — of the three ; nā — not ; yāya — possible ; kathana — to speak .
Madhya-lila 6.197
Sourceঅন্য যত সাধ্য-সাধন করি’ আচ্ছাদন । এই তিনে হরে সিদ্ধ-সাধকের মন ॥” ১৯৭ ॥
anya yata sādhya-sādhana kari’ ācchādana ei tine hare siddha-sādhakera mana
English translation
Translation
“These three items attract the mind of a perfect student engaged in spiritual activities and overcome all other processes of spiritual activity.”
Word meanings
anya — other ; yata — all ; sādhya - sādhana — objectives and transcendental practices ; kari’ — doing ; ācchādana — covering ; ei tine — these three ; hare — take away ; siddha — successful ; sādhakera — of the student engaged in spiritual activities ; mana — the mind .
Purport
Spiritual activities other than bhakti-yoga are divided into three categories — speculative activity conducted by the jñāna-sampradāya (learned scholars), fruitive activity conducted by the general populace according to Vedic regulations, and the activities of transcendentalists not engaged in devotional service. There are many different branches of these categories, but the Supreme Personality of Godhead, by His inconceivable potencies and transcendental qualities, attracts the mind of the student engaged in the activities of karma, jñāna, yoga and so forth. The Supreme Lord is full of inconceivable potencies, which are related to His person, His energies and His transcendental qualities. All of these are very attractive to the serious student. Consequently the Lord is known as Kṛṣṇa, the all-attractive one.
Madhya-lila 6.198
Sourceসনকাদি-শুকদেব তাহাতে প্রমাণ । এইমত নানা অর্থ করেন ব্যাখ্যান ॥ ১৯৮ ॥
sanakādi-śukadeva tāhāte pramāṇa ei-mata nānā artha karena vyākhyāna
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu explained the meaning of the verse by giving evidence concerning Śukadeva Gosvāmī and the four ṛṣis Sanaka, Sanat-kumāra, Sanātana and Sanandana. Thus the Lord gave various meanings and explanations.
Word meanings
sanaka - ādi — the four Sanas ; śukadeva — and Śukadeva Gosvāmī ; tāhāte — in that ; pramāṇa — the evidence ; ei - mata — in this way ; nānā — varieties ; artha — meaning ; karena — does ; vyākhyāna — explanation .
Purport
That Kṛṣṇa is all-attractive is verified by the activities of the four ṛṣis and Śukadeva Gosvāmī. All of them were liberated persons, yet they were attracted by the qualities and pastimes of the Lord. It is therefore said, muktā api līlayā vigrahaṁ kṛtvā bhagavantaṁ bhajante: “Even liberated persons are attracted by the pastimes of Lord Kṛṣṇa and thus engage in devotional service.” (Cc. Madhya 24.112) From the very beginning of their lives, Śukadeva Gosvāmī and the four Kumāras, known as catuḥ-sana, were liberated and self-realized on the Brahman platform. Nonetheless, they were attracted by the qualities of Kṛṣṇa, and they engaged in His service. The four Kumāras were attracted by the aroma of the flowers offered at the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa, and in this way they became devotees. Śukadeva Gosvāmī heard Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam by the mercy of his father, Vyāsadeva, and he was consequently attracted to Kṛṣṇa and became a great devotee. The conclusion is that the transcendental bliss experienced in the service of the Lord must be superior to brahmānanda, the bliss derived from realizing the impersonal Brahman.
Madhya-lila 6.199
Sourceশুনি’ ভট্টাচার্যের মনে হৈল চমৎকার । প্রভুকে কৃষ্ণ জানি’ করে আপনা ধিক্কার ॥ ১৯৯ ॥
śuni’ bhaṭṭācāryera mane haila camatkāra prabhuke kṛṣṇa jāni’ kare āpanā dhikkāra
English translation
Translation
Upon hearing Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s explanation of the ātmārāma verse, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was struck with wonder. He then understood Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu to be Kṛṣṇa in person, and he thus condemned himself in the following words.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing this ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; mane — in the mind ; haila — there was ; camatkāra — wonder ; prabhuke — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; jāni’ — accepting as ; kare — does ; āpanā — himself ; dhikkāra — condemnation .
Madhya-lila 6.200
Source‘ইঁহো ত’ সাক্ষাৎ কৃষ্ণ, — মুঞি না জানিয়া । মহা-অপরাধ কৈনু গর্বিত হইয়া ॥’ ২০০ ॥
‘iṅho ta’ sākṣāt kṛṣṇa, — muñi nā jāniyā mahā-aparādha kainu garvita ha-iyā’
English translation
Translation
“Caitanya Mahāprabhu is certainly Lord Kṛṣṇa Himself. Because I could not understand Him and was very proud of my own learning, I have committed many offenses.”
Word meanings
iṅho — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ta’ — indeed ; sākṣāt — directly ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; muñi — I ; nā — not ; jāniyā — knowing ; mahā - aparādha — a great offense ; kainu — did ; garvita — proud ; ha - iyā — being .
Madhya-lila 6.201
Sourceআত্মনিন্দা করি’ লৈল প্ৰভুর শরণ । কৃপা করিবারে তবে প্রভুর হৈল মন ॥ ২০১ ॥
ātma-nindā kari’ laila prabhura śaraṇa kṛpā karibāre tabe prabhura haila mana
English translation
Translation
When Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya denounced himself as an offender and took shelter of the Lord, the Lord desired to show him mercy.
Word meanings
ātma - nindā — self-indictment ; kari’ — doing ; laila — took ; prabhura — of the Lord ; śaraṇa — shelter ; kṛpā — mercy ; karibāre — to do ; tabe — then ; prabhura — of the Lord ; haila — it was ; mana — the mind .
Madhya-lila 6.202
Sourceনিজ-রূপ প্রভু তাঁরে করাইল দর্শন । চতুর্ভুজ-রূপ প্রভু হইলা তখন ॥ ২০২ ॥
nija-rūpa prabhu tāṅre karāila darśana catur-bhuja-rūpa prabhu hā-ilā takhana
English translation
Translation
To show him mercy, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu allowed him to see His Viṣṇu form. Thus He immediately assumed four hands.
Word meanings
nija - rūpa — personal form ; prabhu — the Lord ; tāṅre — unto him ; karāila — made ; darśana — seeing ; catur - bhuja — four-handed ; rūpa — form ; prabhu — the Lord ; ha - ilā — became ; takhana — at that time .
Madhya-lila 6.203
Sourceদেখাইল তাঁরে আগে চতুর্ভুজ-রূপ । পাছে শ্যাম-বংশীমুখ স্বকীয় স্বরূপ ॥ ২০৩ ॥
dekhāila tāṅre āge catur-bhuja-rūpa pāche śyāma-vaṁśī-mukha svakīya svarūpa
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu first showed him the four-handed form and then appeared before him in His original form of Kṛṣṇa, with a blackish complexion and a flute to His lips.
Word meanings
dekhāila — showed ; tāṅre — unto him ; āge — at first ; catur - bhuja - rūpa — the form with four hands ; pāche — afterwards ; śyāma — blackish ; vaṁśī - mukha — with a flute to the mouth ; svakīya — personal ; svarūpa — form .
Madhya-lila 6.204
Sourceদেখি’ সার্বভৌম দণ্ডবৎ করি’ পড়ি’ । পুনঃ উঠি’ স্তুতি করে দুই কর যুড়ি’ ॥ ২০৪ ॥
dekhi’ sārvabhauma daṇḍavat kari’ paḍi’ punaḥ uṭhi’ stuti kare dui kara yuḍi’
English translation
Translation
When Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya saw the form of Lord Kṛṣṇa manifested in Caitanya Mahāprabhu, he immediately fell down flat to offer Him obeisances. Then he stood up and with folded hands began to offer prayers.
Word meanings
dekhi’ — seeing that ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; daṇḍavat — obeisances ; kari’ — doing ; paḍi’ — falling flat ; punaḥ — again ; uṭhi’ — standing up ; stuti — prayer ; kare — does ; dui — two ; kara — hands ; yuḍi’ — folding .
Madhya-lila 6.205
Sourceপ্রভুর কৃপায় তাঁর স্ফুরিল সব তত্ত্ব । নাম-প্রেমদান-আদি বর্ণেন মহত্ত্ব ॥ ২০৫ ॥
prabhura kṛpāya tāṅra sphurila saba tattva nāma-prema-dāna-ādi varṇena mahattva
English translation
Translation
By the mercy of the Lord, all truths were revealed to Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, and he could understand the importance of chanting the holy name and distributing love of Godhead everywhere.
Word meanings
prabhura — of the Lord ; kṛpāya — by the mercy ; tāṅra — to him ; sphurila — manifested ; saba — all ; tattva — truths ; nāma — the holy name ; prema - dāna — distribution of love of Godhead ; ādi — and so on ; varṇena — describes ; mahattva — the importance .
Madhya-lila 6.206
Sourceশত শ্লোক কৈল এক দণ্ড না যাইতে । বৃহস্পতি তৈছে শ্লোক না পারে করিতে ॥ ২০৬ ॥
śata śloka kaila eka daṇḍa nā yāite bṛhaspati taiche śloka nā pāre karite
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya composed one hundred verses in a very short time. Indeed, not even Bṛhaspati, the priest of the heavenly planets, could compose verses as quickly.
Word meanings
śata — one hundred ; śloka — verses ; kaila — composed ; eka — one ; daṇḍa — a duration of twenty-four minutes ; nā — not ; yāite — passing ; bṛhaspati — Bṛhaspati, the priest of the heavenly planets ; taiche — such ; śloka — verses ; nā — not ; pāre — able ; karite — to compose .
Purport
The name of the book of one hundred beautiful verses composed by Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya is Suśloka-śataka.
Madhya-lila 6.207
Sourceশুনি’ সুখে প্রভু তাঁরে কৈল আলিঙ্গন । ভট্টাচার্য প্রেমাবেশে হৈল অচেতন ॥ ২০৭ ॥
śuni’ sukhe prabhu tāṅre kaila āliṅgana bhaṭṭācārya premāveśe haila acetana
English translation
Translation
After hearing the one hundred verses, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu happily embraced Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, who was immediately overwhelmed in ecstatic love of Godhead and fell unconscious.
Word meanings
śuni’ — hearing ; sukhe — in happiness ; prabhu — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kaila — did ; āliṅgana — embracing ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; prema - āveśe — in the ecstasy of love of God ; haila — became ; acetana — unconscious .
Madhya-lila 6.208
Sourceঅশ্রু, স্তম্ভ, পুলক, স্বেদ, কম্প থরহরি । নাচে, গায়, কান্দে, পড়ে প্রভু-পদ ধরি’ ॥ ২০৮ ॥
aśru, stambha, pulaka, sveda, kampa tharahari nāce, gāya, kānde, paḍe prabhu-pada dhari’
English translation
Translation
Out of ecstatic love of God, the Bhaṭṭācārya shed tears, and his body was stunned. He exhibited an ecstatic mood, and he perspired, shook and trembled. He sometimes danced, sometimes chanted, sometimes cried and sometimes fell down to touch the lotus feet of the Lord.
Word meanings
aśru — tears ; stambha — a stunned condition ; pulaka — standing of hair ; sveda — perspiration ; kampa — trembling ; tharahari — with great shaking ; nāce — dances ; gāya — sings ; kānde — cries ; paḍe — falls down ; prabhu - pada — the lotus feet of the Lord ; dhari’ — catching .
Madhya-lila 6.209
Sourceদেখি’ গোপীনাথাচার্য হরষিত-মন । ভট্টাচার্যের নৃত্য দেখি’ হাসে প্রভুর গণ ॥ ২০৯ ॥
dekhi’ gopīnāthācārya haraṣita-mana bhaṭṭācāryera nṛtya dekhi’ hāse prabhura gaṇa
English translation
Translation
While Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was in this ecstasy, Gopīnātha Ācārya was very pleased. The associates of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu all laughed to see the Bhaṭṭācārya dance so.
Word meanings
dekhi’ — seeing this ; gopīnātha - ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; haraṣita - mana — a pleased mind ; bhaṭṭācāyera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; nṛtya — dancing ; dekhi’ — seeing ; hāse — laughs ; prabhura gaṇa — the associates of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu .
Madhya-lila 6.210
Sourceগোপীনাথাচার্য কহে মহাপ্রভুর প্রতি । ‘সেই ভট্টাচার্যের প্রভু কৈলে এই গতি ॥’ ২১০ ॥
gopīnāthācārya kahe mahāprabhura prati ‘sei bhaṭṭācāryera prabhu kaile ei gati’
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya told Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu, “Sir, You have brought all this upon Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya.”
Word meanings
gopīnātha - ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kahe — said ; mahāprabhura — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; prati — to ; sei bhaṭṭācāryera — of that Bhaṭṭācārya ; prabhu — my Lord ; kaile — You have made ; ei gati — such a situation .
Madhya-lila 6.211
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, — ‘তুমি ভক্ত, তোমার সঙ্গ হৈতে । জগন্নাথ ইঁহারে কৃপা কৈল ভালমতে ॥’ ২১১ ॥
prabhu kahe, — ‘tumi bhakta, tomāra saṅga haite jagannātha iṅhāre kṛpā kaila bhāla-mate’
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied, “You are a devotee. Because of your association, Lord Jagannātha has shown him mercy.”
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord said ; tumi bhakta — you are a devotee ; tomāra saṅga haite — on account of your association ; jagannātha — Lord Jagannātha ; iṅhāre — unto him ; kṛpā — mercy ; kaila — showed ; bhāla - mate — very well .
Madhya-lila 6.212
Sourceতবে ভট্টাচার্যে প্রভু সুস্থির করিল । স্থির হঞা ভট্টাচার্য বহু স্তুতি কৈল ॥ ২১২ ॥
tabe bhaṭṭācārye prabhu susthira karila sthira hañā bhaṭṭācārya bahu stuti kaila
English translation
Translation
After this, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu pacified the Bhaṭṭācārya, and when he was quieted, he offered many prayers to the Lord.
Word meanings
tabe — then ; bhaṭṭācārye — unto Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; su - sthira — pacification ; karila — did ; sthira hañā — being pacified ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; bahu — many ; stuti — prayers ; kaila — offered .
Madhya-lila 6.213
Source‘জগৎ নিস্তারিলে তুমি, — সেহ অল্পকার্য । আমা উদ্ধারিলে তুমি, — এ শক্তি আশ্চর্য ॥ ২১৩ ॥
‘jagat nistārile tumi, — seha alpa-kārya āmā uddhārile tumi, — e śakti āścarya
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said, “My dear Sir, You have delivered the entire world, but that is not a very great task. However, You have also delivered me, and that is certainly the work of very wonderful powers.
Word meanings
jagat — the whole world ; nistārile — have delivered ; tumi — You ; seha — that ; alpa - kārya — minor activity ; āmā — me ; uddhārile — have delivered ; tumi — You ; e — this ; śakti — power ; āścarya — wonderful .
Madhya-lila 6.214
Sourceতর্ক-শাস্ত্রে জড় আমি, যৈছে লৌহপিণ্ড । আমা দ্রবাইলে তুমি, প্রতাপ প্রচণ্ড ॥’ ২১৪ ॥
tarka-śāstre jaḍa āmi, yaiche lauha-piṇḍa āmā dravāile tumi, pratāpa pracaṇḍa’
English translation
Translation
“I had become dull-headed due to reading too many books on logic. Consequently I had become like an iron bar. Nonetheless, You have melted me, and therefore Your influence is very great.”
Word meanings
tarka - śāstre — due to logical scriptures ; jaḍa — dull ; āmi — I ; yaiche — just like ; lauha - piṇḍa — an iron bar ; āmā — me ; dravāile — melted ; tumi — You ; pratāpa — power ; pracaṇḍa — very great .
Madhya-lila 6.215
Sourceস্তুতি শুনি’ মহাপ্রভু নিজ বাসা আইলা । ভট্টাচার্য আচার্য-দ্বারে ভিক্ষা করাইলা ॥ ২১৫ ॥
stuti śuni’ mahāprabhu nija vāsā āilā bhaṭṭācārya ācārya-dvāre bhikṣā karāilā
English translation
Translation
After hearing the prayers offered by Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu returned to His residence, and the Bhaṭṭācārya, through Gopīnātha Ācārya, induced the Lord to accept lunch there.
Word meanings
stuti śuni’ — after hearing the prayers ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nija — own ; vāsā — to the residence ; āilā — returned ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; ācārya - dvāre — through Gopīnātha Ācārya ; bhikṣā — luncheon ; karāilā — induced to take .
Madhya-lila 6.216
Sourceআর দিন প্রভু গেলা জগন্নাথ-দরশনে । দর্শন করিলা জগন্নাথ-শয্যোত্থানে ॥ ২১৬ ॥
āra dina prabhu gelā jagannātha-daraśane darśana karilā jagannātha-śayyotthāne
English translation
Translation
Early the following morning, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu went to see Lord Jagannātha in the temple, and He saw the Lord rise from His bed.
Word meanings
āra dina — the next day ; prabhu — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; gelā — went ; jagannātha - daraśane — to see Jagannātha in the temple ; darśana karilā — saw ; jagannātha - śayyā - utthāne — the Lord’s rising from bed early in the morning .
Madhya-lila 6.217
Sourceপূজারী আনিয়া মালা-প্রসাদান্ন দিলা । প্রসাদান্ন-মালা পাঞা প্রভু হর্ষ হৈলা ॥ ২১৭ ॥
pūjārī āniyā mālā-prasādānna dilā prasādānna-mālā pāñā prabhu harṣa hailā
English translation
Translation
The priest there presented Him with garlands and prasādam that had been offered to Lord Jagannātha. This pleased Caitanya Mahāprabhu very much.
Word meanings
pūjārī — the priest ; āniyā — bringing ; mālā — garlands ; prasāda - anna — remnants of food ; dilā — offered ; prasāda - anna — the prasādam ; mālā — and garlands ; pāñā — getting ; prabhu — Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; harṣa — pleased ; hailā — became .
Madhya-lila 6.218
Sourceসেই প্রসাদান্ন-মালা অঞ্চলে বান্ধিয়া । ভট্টাচার্যের ঘরে আইলা ত্বরাযুক্ত হঞা ॥ ২১৮ ॥
sei prasādānna-mālā añcale bāndhiyā bhaṭṭācāryera ghare āilā tvarāyukta hañā
English translation
Translation
Carefully tying the prasādam and garlands in a cloth, Caitanya Mahāprabhu hastened to the house of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
sei prasāda - anna — those remnants of food ; mālā — and garlands ; añcale — in the end of His cloth ; bāndhiyā — binding ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; ghare — to the house ; āilā — went ; tvarā - yukta — hasty ; hañā — being .
Madhya-lila 6.219
Sourceঅরুণোদয়-কালে হৈল প্রভুর আগমন । সেইকালে ভট্টাচার্যের হৈল জাগরণ ॥ ২১৯ ॥
aruṇodaya-kāle haila prabhura āgamana sei-kāle bhaṭṭācāryera haila jāgaraṇa
English translation
Translation
He arrived at the Bhaṭṭācārya’s house a little before sunrise, just when the Bhaṭṭācārya was arising from bed.
Word meanings
aruṇa - udaya — before sunrise ; kāle — at the time ; haila — there was ; prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āgamana — the coming ; sei - kāle — at that time ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; haila — there was ; jāgaraṇa — arising from bed .
Madhya-lila 6.220
Source‘কৃষ্ণ’ ‘কৃষ্ণ’ স্ফুট কহি’ ভট্টাচার্য জাগিলা । কৃষ্ণনাম শুনি’ প্রভুর আনন্দ বাড়িলা ॥ ২২০ ॥
‘kṛṣṇa’ ‘kṛṣṇa’ sphuṭa kahi’ bhaṭṭācārya jāgilā kṛṣṇa-nāma śuni’ prabhura ānanda bāḍilā
English translation
Translation
As Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya arose from bed, he distinctly chanted, “Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa.” Lord Caitanya was very pleased to hear him chant the holy name of Kṛṣṇa.
Word meanings
kṛṣṇa kṛṣṇa — chanting the name of Kṛṣṇa ; sphuṭa — distinctly ; kahi’ — saying ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; jāgilā — got up from the bed ; kṛṣṇa - nāma — the holy name of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; śuni’ — hearing ; prabhura — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ānanda — pleasure ; bāḍilā — increased .
Madhya-lila 6.221
Sourceবাহিরে প্রভুর তেঁহো পাইল দরশন । আস্তে-ব্যস্তে আসি’ কৈল চরণ বন্দন ॥ ২২১ ॥
bāhire prabhura teṅho pāila daraśana āste-vyaste āsi’ kaila caraṇa vandana
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya noticed Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu outside, and with great haste he went to Him and offered prayers unto His lotus feet.
Word meanings
bāhire — outside the house ; prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; teṅho — he ; pāila — got ; daraśana — sight ; āste - vyaste — with great haste ; āsi’ — coming there ; kaila — did ; caraṇa vandana — worshiping the lotus feet .
Madhya-lila 6.222
Sourceবসিতে আসন দিয়া দুঁহেত বসিলা । প্রসাদান্ন খুলি’ প্রভু তাঁর হাতে দিলা ॥ ২২২ ॥
vasite āsana diyā duṅheta vasilā prasādānna khuli’ prabhu tāṅra hāte dilā
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya offered a carpet for the Lord to sit upon, and both of them sat there. Then Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu opened the prasādam and placed it in the hands of the Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
vasite — to sit ; āsana — carpet ; diyā — offering ; duṅheta — both of them ; vasilā — sat down ; prasāda - anna — the prasādam ; khuli’ — opening ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅra — his ; hāte — in the hand ; dilā — offered .
Madhya-lila 6.223
Sourceপ্রসাদান্ন পাঞা ভট্টাচার্যের আনন্দ হৈল । স্নান, সন্ধ্যা, দন্তধাবন যদ্যপি না কৈল ॥ ২২৩ ॥
prasādānna pāñā bhaṭṭācāryera ānanda haila snāna, sandhyā, danta-dhāvana yadyapi nā kaila
English translation
Translation
At that time the Bhaṭṭācārya had not even washed his mouth, nor had he taken his bath or finished his morning duties. Nonetheless, he was very pleased to receive the prasādam of Lord Jagannātha.
Word meanings
prasāda - anna — the remnants of food ; pāñā — getting ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; ānanda — pleasure ; haila — there was ; snāna — bathing ; sandhyā — morning duties ; danta - dhāvana — washing the teeth ; yadyapi — although ; nā — not ; kaila — finished .
Madhya-lila 6.224
Sourceচৈতন্য-প্রসাদে মনের সব জাড্য গেল । এই শ্লোক পড়ি’ অন্ন ভক্ষণ করিল ॥ ২২৪ ॥
caitanya-prasāde manera saba jāḍya gela ei śloka paḍi’ anna bhakṣaṇa karila
English translation
Translation
By the mercy of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, all the dullness in the mind of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was eradicated. After reciting the following two verses, he ate the prasādam offered to him.
Word meanings
caitanya - prasāde — by the mercy of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; manera — of the mind ; saba — all ; jāḍya — dullness ; gela — went away ; ei śloka — these verses ; paḍi’ — reciting ; anna — remnants of food ; bhakṣaṇa — eating ; karila — did .
Madhya-lila 6.225
Sourceশুষ্কং পর্যুষিতং বাপি নীতং বা দূরদেশতঃ । প্রাপ্তিমাত্রেণ ভোক্তব্যং নাত্র কালবিচারণা ॥ ২২৫ ॥
śuṣkaṁ paryuṣitaṁ vāpi nītaṁ vā dūra-deśataḥ prāpti-mātreṇa bhoktavyaṁ nātra kāla-vicāraṇā
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya said, “ ‘One should eat the mahā-prasādam of the Lord immediately upon receiving it, even though it is dried up, stale or brought from a distant country. One should consider neither time nor place.
Word meanings
śuṣkam — dry ; paryuṣitam — stale ; vā — or ; api — although ; nītam — brought ; vā — or ; dūra - deśataḥ — from a distant country ; prāpti - mātreṇa — only with the receiving ; bhoktavyam — to be eaten ; na — not ; atra — in this ; kāla - vicāraṇā — consideration of time or place .
Madhya-lila 6.226
Sourceন দেশনিয়মস্তত্র ন কালনিয়মস্তথা । প্রাপ্তমন্নং দ্রুতং শিষ্টৈর্ভোক্তব্যং হরিরব্রবীৎ ॥ ২২৬ ॥
na deśa-niyamas tatra na kāla-niyamas tathā prāptam annaṁ drutaṁ śiṣṭair bhoktavyaṁ harir abravīt
English translation
Translation
“ ‘The prasādam of Lord Kṛṣṇa is to be eaten by gentlemen as soon as it is received; there should be no hesitation. There are no regulative principles concerning time and place. This is the order of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.’ ”
Word meanings
na — not ; deśa — of the country ; niyamaḥ — regulation ; tatra — in that ; na — not ; kāla — of time ; niyamaḥ — regulation ; tathā — so also ; prāptam — received ; annam — prasādam ; drutam — hastily ; śiṣṭaiḥ — by gentlemen ; bhoktavyam — to be eaten ; hariḥ — the Lord ; abravīt — has said .
Purport
These verses are quoted from the Padma Purāṇa.
Madhya-lila 6.227
Sourceদেখি’ আনন্দিত হৈল মহাপ্রভুর মন । প্রেমাবিষ্ট হঞা প্রভু কৈলা আলিঙ্গন ॥ ২২৭ ॥
dekhi’ ānandita haila mahāprabhura mana premāviṣṭa hañā prabhu kailā āliṅgana
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was very pleased to see this. He became ecstatic in love of Godhead and embraced Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya.
Word meanings
dekhi’ — seeing this ; ānandita — very pleased ; haila — was ; mahāprabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mana — the mind ; prema - āviṣṭa — absorbed in the ecstasy of love of God ; hañā — becoming ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kailā — did ; āliṅgana — embracing .
Madhya-lila 6.228
Sourceদুইজনে ধরি’ দুঁহে করেন নর্তন । প্ৰভু-ভৃত্য দুঁহা স্পর্শে, দোঁহার ফুলে মন ॥ ২২৮ ॥
dui-jane dhari’ duṅhe karena nartana prabhu-bhṛtya duṅhā sparśe, doṅhāra phule mana
English translation
Translation
The Lord and the servant embraced each other and began to dance. Simply by touching each other, they became ecstatic.
Word meanings
dui - jane — both of them ; dhari’ — embracing ; duṅhe — both ; karena — do ; nartana — dancing ; prabhu - bhṛtya — the master and the servant ; duṅhā — both ; sparśe — by touching each other ; doṅhāra — of both of them ; phule — were excited ; mana — minds .
Madhya-lila 6.229
Sourceস্বেদ-কম্প-অশ্রু দুঁহে আনন্দে ভাসিলা । প্রেমাবিষ্ট হঞা প্রভু কহিতে লাগিলা ॥ ২২৯ ॥
sveda-kampa-aśru duṅhe ānande bhāsilā premāviṣṭa hañā prabhu kahite lāgilā
English translation
Translation
As they danced and embraced, spiritual symptoms manifested in their bodies. They perspired, trembled and shed tears, and the Lord began to speak in His ecstasy.
Word meanings
sveda — perspiration ; kampa — trembling ; aśru — tears ; duṅhe — both of them ; ānande — in transcendental bliss ; bhāsilā — floated ; prema - āviṣṭa — absorbed in ecstatic love of Godhead ; hañā — being ; prabhu — the Lord ; kahite — to speak ; lāgilā — began .
Madhya-lila 6.230
Source“আজি মুঞি অনায়াসে জিনিনু ত্রিভুবন । আজি মুঞি করিনু বৈকুন্ঠ আরোহণ ॥ ২৩০ ॥
“āji muñi anāyāse jininu tribhuvana āji muñi karinu vaikuṇṭha ārohaṇa
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “Today I have conquered the three worlds very easily. Today I have ascended to the spiritual world.”
Word meanings
āji — today ; muñi — I ; anāyāse — very easily ; jininu — conquered ; tri - bhuvana — the three worlds ; āji — today ; muñi — I ; karinu — did ; vaikuṇṭha — to the spiritual world ; ārohaṇa — ascending .
Purport
The goal of human perfection is stated here in brief. One has to surpass all the planetary systems of the material universe, pierce through the covering of the universe and reach the spiritual world, known as Vaikuṇṭhaloka. The Vaikuṇṭhalokas are variegated spiritual planets situated in the Lord’s impersonal bodily effulgence, known as the brahmajyoti. One may aspire to elevate himself to a heavenly planet within the material world, such as the moon, the sun or Venus, but if one is spiritually advanced in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, he does not wish to remain within the material universe, even in a higher planetary system. Rather, he prefers to penetrate the covering of the universe and attain the spiritual world. He can then be situated in one of the Vaikuṇṭha planets there. However, the devotees under the guidance of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu aspire to reach the topmost spiritual planet, known as Goloka Vṛndāvana, the residence of Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa and His eternal associates.
Madhya-lila 6.231
Sourceআজি মোর পূর্ণ হৈল সর্ব অভিলাষ । সার্বভৌমের হৈল মহাপ্রসাদে বিশ্বাস ॥ ২৩১ ॥
āji mora pūrṇa haila sarva abhilāṣa sārvabhaumera haila mahā-prasāde viśvāsa
English translation
Translation
Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “I think that today all My desires have been fulfilled because I see that Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya has acquired faith in the mahā-prasādam of Lord Jagannātha.
Word meanings
āji — today ; mora — My ; pūrṇa — satisfied ; haila — became ; sarva — all ; abhilāṣa — desires ; sārvabhaumera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; haila — there was ; mahā - prasāde — in the remnants of the Lord’s food ; viśvāsa — faith .
Madhya-lila 6.232
Sourceআজি তুমি নিষ্কপটে হৈলা কৃষ্ণাশ্রয় । কৃষ্ণ আজি নিষ্কপটে তোমা হৈল সদয় ॥ ২৩২ ॥
āji tumi niṣkapaṭe hailā kṛṣṇāśraya kṛṣṇa āji niṣkapaṭe tomā haila sadaya
English translation
Translation
“Indeed, today you have undoubtedly taken shelter of the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa, and Kṛṣṇa, without reservation, has become very merciful toward you.
Word meanings
āji — today ; tumi — you ; niṣkapaṭe — without a doubt ; hailā — have become ; kṛṣṇa - āśraya — under the shelter of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; āji — today ; niṣkapaṭe — without reservation ; tomā — unto you ; haila — has become ; sa - daya — very merciful .
Madhya-lila 6.233
Sourceআজি সে খণ্ডিল তোমার দেহাদি-বন্ধন । আজি তুমি ছিন্ন কৈলে মায়ার বন্ধন ॥ ২৩৩ ॥
āji se khaṇḍila tomāra dehādi-bandhana āji tumi chinna kaile māyāra bandhana
English translation
Translation
“My dear Bhaṭṭācārya, today you have been released from material bondage in the bodily conception of life; you have cut to pieces the shackles of the illusory energy.
Word meanings
āji — today ; se — that ; khaṇḍila — dismantled ; tomāra — your ; deha - ādi - bandhana — material bondage due to the bodily concept of life ; āji — today ; tumi — you ; chinna — cut to pieces ; kaile — did ; māyāra — of illusory energy ; bandhana — the shackles .
Madhya-lila 6.234
Sourceআজি কৃষ্ণপ্রাপ্তি-যোগ্য হৈল তোমার মন । বেদ-ধর্ম লঙ্ঘি’ কৈলে প্রসাদ ভক্ষণ ॥” ২৩৪ ॥
āji kṛṣṇa-prāpti-yogya haila tomāra mana veda-dharma laṅghi’ kaile prasāda bhakṣaṇa”
English translation
Translation
“Today your mind has become fit to take shelter of the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa because, surpassing the Vedic regulative principles, you have eaten the remnants of food offered to the Lord.
Word meanings
āji — today ; kṛṣṇa - prāpti — for attainment of the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa ; yogya — fit ; haila — has become ; tomāra — your ; mana — mind ; veda — of the four Vedas ; dharma — the principles ; laṅghi’ — surpassing ; kaile — you have done ; prasāda — the remnants of food offered to Kṛṣṇa ; bhakṣaṇa — eating .
Madhya-lila 6.235
Sourceযেষাং স এষ ভগবান্ দয়য়েদনন্তঃ সর্বাত্মনাশ্রিতপদো যদি নির্ব্যলীকম্ । তে দুস্তরামতিতরন্তি চ দেবমায়াং নৈষাং মমাহমিতিধীঃ শ্বশৃগালভক্ষ্যে ॥ ২৩৫ ॥
yeṣāṁ sa eṣa bhagavān dayayed anantaḥ sarvātmanāśrita-pado yadi nirvyalīkam te dustarām atitaranti ca deva-māyāṁ naiṣāṁ mamāham iti dhīḥ śva-śṛgāla-bhakṣye
English translation
Translation
“ ‘When a person takes shelter of the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead without reservation, the unlimited, merciful Lord bestows His causeless mercy upon him. Thus he can pass over the insurmountable ocean of nescience. Those whose intelligence is fixed in the bodily conception, who think, “I am this body,” are fit food for dogs and jackals. The Supreme Lord never bestows His mercy upon such people.’ ”
Word meanings
yeṣām — unto those who are fully surrendered souls ; saḥ — He ; eṣaḥ — this ; bhagavān — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; dayayet — may show mercy ; anantaḥ — the unlimited ; sarva - ātmanā — fully, without reservation ; āśrita - padaḥ — those who have taken shelter of the Lord ; yadi — if ; nirvyalīkam — without duplicity ; te — such persons ; dustarām — insurmountable ; atitaranti — surpass ; ca — also ; deva - māyām — the illusory material energy ; na — not ; eṣām — this ; mama aham — “my” and “I” ; iti — such ; dhīḥ — intelligence ; śva - śṛgāla - bhakṣye — in the body, which is to be eaten by dogs and jackals .
Purport
The Supreme Lord never bestows His benediction upon those fixed in the bodily conception. As Kṛṣṇa clearly states in the Bhagavad-gītā (18.66) :
sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ahaṁ tvāṁ sarva-pāpebhyo mokṣayiṣyāmi mā śucaḥ
“Abandon all varieties of religion and just surrender unto Me. I shall deliver you from all sinful reactions. Do not fear.”
The verse that Caitanya Mahāprabhu quoted ( Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam 2.7.42 ) explains the meaning of Śrī Kṛṣṇa’s statement. Kṛṣṇa bestowed His causeless mercy upon Arjuna just to get him out of the bodily conception. This was done at the very beginning of the second chapter of the Bhagavad-gītā (2.13) , where Kṛṣṇa says, dehino ’smin yathā dehe kaumāraṁ yauvanaṁ jarā. In this body, there is an owner, and one should not consider the body to be the self. This is the first instruction to be assimilated by a devotee. If one is under the bodily conception, he is unable to realize his true identity and engage in the loving devotional service of the Lord. Unless one comes to the transcendental position, he cannot expect the causeless mercy of the Supreme Lord, nor can he cross over the vast ocean of material nescience. Lord Kṛṣṇa confirms this in the Bhagavad-gītā (7.14) : mām eva ye prapadyante māyām etāṁ taranti te. Without surrendering unto the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa, one cannot expect release from the clutches of māyā, the illusory energy. According to Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.2.32) , Māyāvādī sannyāsīs who falsely think of themselves as liberated from the clutches of māyā are called vimukta-māninaḥ. Actually, they are not liberated, but they think that they have become liberated and have become Nārāyaṇa Himself. Although they have apparently realized that they are not the material body but spirit soul, they nonetheless neglect the duty of the spirit soul, which is to render service to the Supreme Soul. Therefore their intelligence remains unsanctified. Unless one’s intelligence is sanctified, one cannot apply it to understanding devotional service. Devotional service begins when the mind, intelligence and ego are completely purified. Māyāvādī sannyāsīs do not purify their intelligence, mind and ego, and consequently they cannot engage in the service of the Lord or expect the causeless mercy of the Lord. Although they rise to a very high position by executing severe austerities and penances, they still hover in the material world without the benediction of the lotus feet of the Lord. Sometimes they rise to the Brahman effulgence, but because their minds are not completely purified, they must return to material existence.
The karmīs are fully under the bodily conception of life, and the jñānīs, although theoretically understanding that they are not the body, also have no information about the lotus feet of the Lord because they overly stress impersonalism. Consequently both karmīs and jñānīs are unfit for receiving the mercy of the Lord and becoming devotees. Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura therefore says, karma-kāṇḍa jñāna-kāṇḍa, kevala viṣera bhāṇḍa: those who have taken to the process of karma-kāṇḍa (fruitive activity) and jñāna-kāṇḍa (speculation on the science of transcendence) have simply eaten from poisoned pots. They are condemned to remain in material existence life after life until they take shelter of the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa. This is confirmed in Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā (7.19):
bahūnāṁ janmanām ante jñānavān māṁ prapadyate vāsudevaḥ sarvam iti sa mahātmā su-durlabhaḥ
“After many births and deaths, he who is actually in knowledge surrenders unto Me, knowing Me to be the cause of all causes and all that is. Such a great soul is very rare.”
Madhya-lila 6.236
Sourceএত কহি’ মহাপ্রভু আইলা নিজ-স্থানে । সেই হৈতে ভট্টাচার্যের খণ্ডিল অভিমানে ॥ ২৩৬ ॥
eta kahi’ mahāprabhu āilā nija-sthāne sei haite bhaṭṭācāryera khaṇḍila abhimāne
English translation
Translation
After speaking to Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya in this way, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu returned to His residence. From that day on, the Bhaṭṭācārya was free because his false pride had been dismantled.
Word meanings
eta kahi’ — speaking in this way ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āilā — returned ; nija - sthāne — to His own residence ; sei haite — from that time ; bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; khaṇḍila — was dismantled ; abhimāne — false pride .
Madhya-lila 6.237
Sourceচৈতন্য-চরণ বিনে নাহি জানে আন । ভক্তি বিনু শাস্ত্রের আর না করে ব্যাখ্যান ॥ ২৩৭ ॥
caitanya-caraṇa vine nāhi jāne āna bhakti vinu śāstrera āra nā kare vyākhyāna
English translation
Translation
From that day on, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya did not know anything but the lotus feet of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu, and from that day he could explain the revealed scriptures only in accordance with the process of devotional service.
Word meanings
caitanya - caraṇa — the lotus feet of Lord Caitanya ; vine — except ; nāhi — not ; jāne — knows ; āna — other ; bhakti — devotional service ; vinu — except ; śāstrera — of the scripture ; āra — any other ; nā — not ; kare — does ; vyākhyāna — explanation .
Madhya-lila 6.238
Sourceগোপীনাথাচার্য তাঁর বৈষ্ণবতা দেখিয়া । ‘হরি’ ‘হরি’ বলি’ নাচে হাতে তালি দিয়া ॥ ২৩৮ ॥
gopīnāthācārya tāṅra vaiṣṇavatā dekhiyā ‘hari’ ‘hari’ bali’ nāce hāte tāli diyā
English translation
Translation
Seeing that Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was firmly fixed in the cult of Vaiṣṇavism, Gopīnātha Ācārya, his brother-in-law, began to dance, clap his hands and chant, “Hari! Hari!”
Word meanings
gopīnātha - ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya, the brother-in-law of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; tāṅra — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; vaiṣṇavatā — firm faith in Vaiṣṇavism ; dekhiyā — seeing ; hari hari — the holy name of the Lord ; bali’ — saying ; nāce — dances ; hāte tāli diyā — clapping his two hands .
Madhya-lila 6.239
Sourceআর দিন ভট্টাচার্য আইলা দর্শনে । জগন্নাথ না দেখি’ আইলা প্রভুস্থানে ॥ ২৩৯ ॥
āra dina bhaṭṭācārya āilā darśane jagannātha nā dekhi’ āilā prabhu-sthāne
English translation
Translation
The next day, the Bhaṭṭācārya went to visit the temple of Lord Jagannātha, but before he reached the temple, he went to see Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
āra dina — the next day ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; āilā — came ; darśane — to see Lord Jagannātha ; jagannātha — Lord Jagannātha ; nā dekhi’ — without seeing ; āilā — came ; prabhu - sthāne — to the place of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .
Madhya-lila 6.240
Sourceদণ্ডবৎ করি’ কৈল বহুবিধ স্তুতি । দৈন্য করি’ কহে নিজ পূর্বদুর্মতি ॥ ২৪০ ॥
daṇḍavat kari’ kaila bahu-vidha stuti dainya kari’ kahe nija pūrva-durmati
English translation
Translation
When he met Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu, the Bhaṭṭācārya fell down flat to offer Him respects. After offering various prayers to Him, he spoke of his previous bad disposition with great humility.
Word meanings
daṇḍavat kari’ — after offering obeisances by falling flat on the ground ; kaila — he did ; bahu - vidha — various types of ; stuti — prayers ; dainya kari’ — in great humbleness ; kahe — describes ; nija — his personal ; pūrva - durmati — previous bad disposition .
Madhya-lila 6.241
Sourceভক্তিসাধন-শ্রেষ্ঠ শুনিতে হৈল মন । প্রভু উপদেশ কৈল নাম-সংকীর্তন ॥ ২৪১ ॥
bhakti-sādhana-śreṣṭha śunite haila mana prabhu upadeśa kaila nāma-saṅkīrtana
English translation
Translation
Then the Bhaṭṭācārya asked Caitanya Mahāprabhu, “Which item is most important in the execution of devotional service?” The Lord replied that the most important item was the chanting of the holy name of the Lord.
Word meanings
bhakti - sādhana — in the execution of devotional service ; śreṣṭha — the most important item ; śunite — to hear ; haila — it was ; mana — the mind ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; upadeśa — advice ; kaila — gave ; nāma - saṅkīrtana — chanting of the holy name of the Lord .
Purport
There are nine items to be executed in devotional service. These are enumerated in the following verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (7.5.23):
śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ smaraṇaṁ pāda-sevanam arcanaṁ vandanaṁ dāsyaṁ sakhyam ātma-nivedanam
Hearing the glories of the Lord, chanting, remembering, serving the lotus feet of the Lord, offering worship in the temple, offering prayers, becoming a servant of the Lord, becoming the Lord’s friend, and sarvātma-nivedana, offering oneself fully at the lotus feet of the Lord — these are the nine devotional processes. In The Nectar of Devotion, these are expanded into sixty-four items. When Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya asked the Lord which item was most important, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu immediately answered that the most important item is the chanting of the holy names of the Lord — Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare. He then quoted the following verse from the Bṛhan-nāradīya Purāṇa (thirty-eighth chapter, verse 126) to confirm His statement.
Madhya-lila 6.242
Sourceহরের্নাম হরের্নাম হরের্নামৈব কেবলম্ । কলৌ নাস্ত্যেব নাস্ত্যেব নাস্ত্যেব গতিরন্যথা ॥ ২৪২ ॥
harer nāma harer nāma harer nāmaiva kevalam kalau nāsty eva nāsty eva nāsty eva gatir anyathā
English translation
Translation
“ ‘In this age of quarrel and hypocrisy, the only means of deliverance is the chanting of the holy names of the Lord. There is no other way. There is no other way. There is no other way.’ ”
Word meanings
hareḥ nāma — the holy name of the Lord Hari ; hareḥ nāma — the holy name of the Lord Hari ; hareḥ nāma — the holy name of the Lord ; eva — certainly ; kevalam — only ; kalau — in this Age of Kali ; na asti — there is not ; eva — certainly ; na asti — there is not ; eva — certainly ; na asti — there is not ; eva — certainly ; gatiḥ — means ; anyathā — other .
Purport
Because the people of this age are so fallen, they can simply chant the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra. In this way they can rid themselves of the bodily conception of life and become eligible to engage in the Lord’s devotional service. One cannot engage in the devotional service of the Lord without being purified of all contamination. This is confirmed in the Bhagavad-gītā (7.28) :
yeṣāṁ tv anta-gataṁ pāpaṁ janānāṁ puṇya-karmaṇām te dvandva-moha-nirmuktā bhajante māṁ dṛḍha-vratāḥ
“Persons who have acted piously in previous lives and in this life and whose sinful actions are completely eradicated are freed from the dualities of delusion, and they engage themselves in My service with determination.” Sometimes people are surprised to see young men and women take so seriously to the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement. By giving up sinful activity — illicit sex, meat-eating, intoxication and gambling — and strictly following the injunctions given by the spiritual master, they have become purified of all contamination. They can therefore fully engage in the devotional service of the Lord.
In this Age of Kali, hari-kīrtana is very, very important. The importance of chanting the holy name of the Lord is stated in the following verses from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (12.3.51-52):
kaler doṣa-nidhe rājann asti hy eko mahān guṇaḥ kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya mukta-saṅgaḥ paraṁ vrajet
kṛte yad dhyāyato viṣṇuṁ tretāyāṁ yajato makhaiḥ dvāpare paricaryāyāṁ kalau tad dhari-kīrtanāt
“The most important factor in this Age of Kali, which is an ocean of faults, is that one can be free from all contamination and become eligible to enter the kingdom of God simply by chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra. The self-realization that was achieved in the Satya millennium by meditation, in the Tretā millennium by the performance of different sacrifices, and in the Dvāpara millennium by worship of Lord Kṛṣṇa can be achieved in the Age of Kali simply by chanting the holy names, Hare Kṛṣṇa.”
Madhya-lila 6.243
Sourceএই শ্লোকের অর্থ শুনাইল করিয়া বিস্তার । শুনি’ ভট্টাচার্য-মনে হৈল চমৎকার ॥ ২৪৩ ॥
ei ślokera artha śunāila kariyā vistāra śuni’ bhaṭṭācārya-mane haila camatkāra
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu very elaborately explained the harer nāma verse of the Bṛhan-nāradīya Purāṇa, and Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was struck with wonder to hear His explanation.
Word meanings
ei ślokera — of this verse ; artha — the meaning ; śunāila — made hear ; kariyā — doing ; vistāra — extensive description ; śuni’ — hearing ; bhaṭṭācārya — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; mane — in the mind ; haila — there was ; camatkāra — wonder .
Madhya-lila 6.244
Sourceগোপীনাথাচার্য বলে — ‘আমি পূর্বে যে কহিল । শুন, ভট্টাচার্য, তোমার সেই ত’ হইল’ ॥ ২৪৪ ॥
gopīnāthācārya bale, — ‘āmi pūrve ye kahila śuna, bhaṭṭācārya, tomāra sei ta’ ha-ila’
English translation
Translation
Gopīnātha Ācārya reminded Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, “My dear Bhaṭṭācārya, what I foretold to you has now taken place.”
Word meanings
gopīnātha - ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; bale — says ; āmi — I ; pūrve — previously ; ye — what ; kahila — said ; śuna — hear ; bhaṭṭācārya — my dear Bhaṭṭācārya ; tomāra — your ; sei — that ; ta’ — indeed ; ha - ila — has happened .
Purport
Previously Gopīnātha Ācārya had informed Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya that when he would be blessed by the Lord he would thoroughly understand the transcendental process of devotional service. This prediction was now fulfilled. The Bhaṭṭācārya was fully converted to the cult of Vaiṣṇavism, and he was following the principles automatically, without being pressured. In the Bhagavad-gītā (2.40) it is therefore said, sv-alpam apy asya dharmasya trāyate mahato bhayāt: “Simply by performing a little devotional service, one can escape the greatest danger.” Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya had been in the greatest danger because he had adhered to Māyāvāda philosophy. Somehow or other he came into contact with Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and became a perfect devotee. In this way he was saved from the great falldown of impersonalism.
Madhya-lila 6.245
Sourceভট্টাচার্য কহে তাঁরে করি’ নমস্কারে । তোমার সম্বন্ধে প্রভু কৃপা কৈল মোরে ॥ ২৪৫ ॥
bhaṭṭācārya kahe tāṅre kari’ namaskāre tomāra sambandhe prabhu kṛpā kaila more
English translation
Translation
Offering his obeisances to Gopīnātha Ācārya, the Bhaṭṭācārya said, “Because I am related to you and you are a devotee, by your mercy the Lord has shown mercy to me.
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya kahe — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied ; tāṅre — unto Gopīnātha Ācārya ; kari’ — doing ; namaskāre — obeisances ; tomāra sambandhe — on account of your relationship ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kṛpā — mercy ; kaila — showed ; more — unto me .
Madhya-lila 6.246
Sourceতুমি — মহাভাগবত, আমি — তর্ক-অন্ধে । প্রভু কৃপা কৈল মোরে তোমার সম্বন্ধে ॥ ২৪৬ ॥
tumi — mahābhāgavata, āmi — tarka-andhe prabhu kṛpā kaila more tomāra sambandhe
English translation
Translation
“You are a first-class devotee, whereas I am in the darkness of logical arguments. Because of your relationship with the Lord, the Lord has bestowed His benediction upon me.”
Word meanings
tumi — you ; mahā - bhāgavata — a first-class devotee ; āmi — I ; tarka - andhe — in the darkness of logical arguments ; prabhu — the Lord ; kṛpā — mercy ; kaila — showed ; more — unto me ; tomāra — your ; sambandhe — by the relationship .
Madhya-lila 6.247
Sourceবিনয় শুনি’ তুষ্ট্যে প্রভু কৈল আলিঙ্গন । কহিল, — যাঞা করহ ঈশ্বর দরশন ॥ ২৪৭ ॥
vinaya śuni’ tuṣṭye prabhu kaila āliṅgana kahila, — yāñā karaha īśvara daraśana
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was very pleased with this humble statement. After embracing the Bhaṭṭācārya, He said, “Now go see Lord Jagannātha in the temple.”
Word meanings
vinaya śuni’ — upon hearing this humbleness of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; tuṣṭye — in satisfaction ; prabhu — the Lord ; kaila — did ; āliṅgana — embracing ; kahila — said ; yāñā — going ; karaha — do ; īśvara daraśana — visiting the temple of Lord Jagannātha .
Madhya-lila 6.248
Sourceজগদানন্দ দামোদর, — দুই সঙ্গে লঞা । ঘরে আইল ভট্টাচার্য জগন্নাথ দেখিয়া ॥ ২৪৮ ॥
jagadānanda dāmodara, — dui saṅge lañā ghare āila bhaṭṭācārya jagannātha dekhiyā
English translation
Translation
After visiting the temple of Lord Jagannātha, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya returned home with Jagadānanda and Dāmodara.
Word meanings
jagadānanda — Jagadānanda ; dāmodara — Dāmodara ; dui — two persons ; saṅge — with him ; lañā — taking ; ghare — to his home ; āila — returned ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; jagannātha — Lord Jagannātha ; dekhiyā — seeing in the temple .
Madhya-lila 6.249
Sourceউত্তম উত্তম প্রসাদ বহুত আনিলা । নিজবিপ্ৰ-হাতে দুই জনা সঙ্গে দিলা ॥ ২৪৯ ॥
uttama uttama prasāda bahuta ānilā nija-vipra-hāte dui janā saṅge dilā
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya brought large quantities of excellent food remnants blessed by Lord Jagannātha. All this prasādam was given to his own brāhmaṇa servant, along with Jagadānanda and Dāmodara.
Word meanings
uttama uttama — very first-class ; prasāda — remnants of food offered to Jagannātha ; bahuta — in great quantity ; ānilā — brought ; nija - vipra — of his own brāhmaṇa servant ; hāte — in the hand ; dui — two ; janā — persons ; saṅge — with him ; dilā — gave .
Madhya-lila 6.250
Sourceনিজ কৃত দুই শ্লোক লিখিয়া তালপাতে । ‘প্ৰভুকে দিহ’ বলি’ দিল জগদানন্দ হাতে ॥ ২৫০ ॥
nija kṛta dui śloka likhiyā tāla-pāte ‘prabhuke diha’ bali’ dila jagadānanda-hāte
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya then composed two verses on the leaf of a palm tree. Giving the palm leaf to Jagadānanda Prabhu, the Bhaṭṭācārya requested him to deliver it to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
nija — by him ; kṛta — composed ; dui — two ; śloka — verses ; likhiyā — writing ; tāla - pāte — on a leaf of a palm tree ; prabhuke diha — give to Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bali’ — saying this ; dila — gave it ; jagadānanda - hāte — in the hands of Jagadānanda .
Madhya-lila 6.251
Sourceপ্ৰভু-স্থানে আইলা দুঁহে প্রসাদ-পত্রী লঞা । মুকুন্দ দত্ত পত্রী নিল তার হাতে পাঞা ॥ ২৫১ ॥
prabhu-sthāne āilā duṅhe prasāda-patrī lañā mukunda datta patrī nila tāra hāte pāñā
English translation
Translation
Jagadānanda and Dāmodara then returned to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, bringing Him both the prasādam and the palm leaf on which the verses were composed. But Mukunda Datta took the palm leaf from the hands of Jagadānanda before he could deliver it to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
prabhu - sthāne — to the place where Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was residing ; āilā — went back ; duṅhe — both Jagadānanda and Dāmodara ; prasāda — the remnants of food ; patrī — the leaf of a palm tree ; lañā — taking ; mukunda datta — Mukunda Datta ; patrī — the leaf of a palm tree ; nila — took ; tāra — of Jagadānanda ; hāte — in the hand ; pāñā — receiving .
Madhya-lila 6.252
Sourceদুই শ্লোক বাহির-ভিতে লিখিয়া রাখিল । তবে জগদানন্দ পত্রী প্রভুকে লঞা দিল ॥ ২৫২ ॥
dui śloka bāhira-bhite likhiyā rākhila tabe jagadānanda patrī prabhuke lañā dila
English translation
Translation
Mukunda Datta then copied the two verses on the wall outside the room. After this, Jagadānanda took the palm leaf from Mukunda Datta and delivered it to Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
dui — two ; śloka — verses ; bāhira — outside ; bhite — on the wall ; likhiyā — writing ; rākhila — kept ; tabe — thereafter ; jagadānanda — Jagadānanda Prabhu ; patrī — the palm leaf ; prabhuke — to the Lord ; lañā — taking ; dila — delivered .
Madhya-lila 6.253
Sourceপ্রভু শ্লোক পড়ি’ পত্র ছিণ্ডিয়া ফেলিল । ভিত্ত্যে দেখি’ ভক্ত সব শ্লোক কণ্ঠে কৈল ॥ ২৫৩ ॥
prabhu śloka paḍi’ patra chiṇḍiyā phelila bhittye dekhi’ bhakta saba śloka kaṇṭhe kaila
English translation
Translation
As soon as Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu read the two verses, He immediately tore up the palm leaf. However, all the devotees read these verses on the outside wall, and they all kept them within their hearts. The verses read as follows.
Word meanings
prabhu — the Lord ; śloka — verses ; paḍi’ — reading ; patra — the palm leaf ; chiṇḍiyā — tearing to pieces ; phelila — threw ; bhittye — on the outside wall ; dekhi’ — seeing ; bhakta — the devotees ; saba — all ; śloka — verses ; kaṇṭhe — within the throat ; kaila — kept .
Madhya-lila 6.254
Sourceবৈরাগ্য-বিদ্যা-নিজ-ভক্তিযোগ-শিক্ষার্থমেকঃ পুরুষঃ পুরাণঃ । শ্রীকৃষ্ণচৈতন্যশরীরধারী কৃপাম্বুধির্যস্তমহং প্ৰপদ্যে ॥ ২৫৪ ॥
vairāgya-vidyā-nija-bhakti-yoga- śikṣārtham ekaḥ puruṣaḥ purāṇaḥ śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya-śarīra-dhārī kṛpāmbudhir yas tam ahaṁ prapadye
English translation
Translation
“Let me take shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Śrī Kṛṣṇa, who has descended in the form of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu to teach us real knowledge, His devotional service and detachment from whatever does not foster Kṛṣṇa consciousness. He has descended because He is an ocean of transcendental mercy. Let me surrender unto His lotus feet.
Word meanings
vairāgya — detachment from everything that does not help develop Kṛṣṇa consciousness ; vidyā — knowledge ; nija — own ; bhakti - yoga — devotional service ; śikṣā - artham — just to instruct ; ekaḥ — the single person ; puruṣaḥ — the Supreme Person ; purāṇaḥ — very old, or eternal ; śrī - kṛṣṇa - caitanya — of Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śarīra - dhārī — accepting the body ; kṛpā - ambudhiḥ — the ocean of transcendental mercy ; yaḥ — who ; tam — unto Him ; aham — I ; prapadye — surrender .
Purport
This verse and the following verse are included in the Caitanya-candrodaya-nāṭaka (6.74-75), by Śrī Kavi-karṇapūra.
Madhya-lila 6.255
Sourceকালান্নষ্টং ভক্তিযোগং নিজং যঃ প্ৰাদুষ্কর্তুং কৃষ্ণচৈতন্যনামা । আবির্ভূতস্তস্য পাদারবিন্দে গাঢ়ং গাঢ়ং লীয়তাং চিত্তভৃঙ্গঃ ॥ ২৫৫ ॥
kālān naṣṭaṁ bhakti-yogaṁ nijaṁ yaḥ prāduṣkartuṁ kṛṣṇa-caitanya-nāmā āvirbhūtas tasya pādāravinde gāḍhaṁ gāḍhaṁ līyatāṁ citta-bhṛṅgaḥ
English translation
Translation
“Let my consciousness, which is like a honeybee, take shelter of the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who has just now appeared as Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu to teach the ancient system of devotional service to Himself. This system had almost been lost due to the influence of time.”
Word meanings
kālāt — from misuse of material propensities and attachment to fruitive activities and speculative knowledge over the course of time ; naṣṭam — destroyed ; bhakti - yogam — the science of devotional service ; nijam — which is applicable to Him only ; yaḥ — one who ; prāduṣkartum — to revive ; kṛṣṇa - caitanya - nāmā — named Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āvirbhūtaḥ — who has appeared ; tasya — His ; pāda - aravinde — in the lotus feet ; gāḍham gāḍham — very deeply ; līyatām — let it be merged ; citta - bhṛṅgaḥ — my consciousness, like a honeybee .
Purport
As Lord Kṛṣṇa states in the Bhagavad-gītā (4.7) :
yadā yadā hi dharmasya glānir bhavati bhārata abhyutthānam adharmasya tadātmānaṁ sṛjāmy aham
“Whenever and wherever there is a decline in religious practice, O descendant of Bharata, and a predominant rise of irreligion — at that time I descend Myself.”
This is also the case with Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s appearance. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu appeared in this world as a disguised incarnation of Kṛṣṇa, but His appearance is confirmed in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, the Mahābhārata and other Vedic scriptures. He appeared in order to teach the fallen souls in this material world, for in this Age of Kali almost everyone has become attached to fruitive and ritualistic activities and mental speculation. Consequently there was a great need to revive the system of devotional service. The Lord Himself personally came down disguised as a devotee so that the fallen populace might take advantage of the Lord’s example.
At the conclusion of the Bhagavad-gītā, Lord Kṛṣṇa advised complete surrender unto Him, promising all protection to His devotee. Unfortunately, people are so fallen that they cannot accept the instructions of Lord Kṛṣṇa; therefore Kṛṣṇa returned with the same mission, but He executed it in a different way. As Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, He ordered us to surrender unto Himself, but as Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, He taught us how to surrender to Kṛṣṇa. Therefore He is praised by the Gosvāmīs: namo mahā-vadānyāya kṛṣṇa-prema-pradāye te. Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa is certainly the Personality of Godhead, but He is not as magnanimous as Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Lord Kṛṣṇa simply gave orders for one to become His devotee ( man-manā bhava mad-bhaktaḥ ), but Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu actually taught the process of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. If one wants to become a devotee of Kṛṣṇa, he must first take shelter of the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, following in the footsteps of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya and other exalted devotees.
Madhya-lila 6.256
Sourceএই দুই শ্লোক — ভক্তকন্ঠে রত্নহার । সার্বভৌমের কীর্তি ঘোষে ঢক্কাবাদ্যাকার ॥ ২৫৬ ॥
ei dui śloka — bhakta-kaṇṭhe ratna-hāra sārvabhaumera kīrti ghoṣe ḍhakkā-vādyākāra
English translation
Translation
These two verses composed by Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya will always declare his name and fame as loudly as a pounding drum, for they have become pearl necklaces around the necks of all devotees.
Word meanings
ei dui śloka — these two verses ; bhakta - kaṇṭhe — on the necks of the devotees ; ratna - hāra — pearl necklaces ; sārvabhaumera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kīrti — reputation ; ghoṣe — declare ; ḍhakkā — of a drum ; vādya — of the sound ; ākāra — in the form .
Madhya-lila 6.257
Sourceসার্বভৌম হৈলা প্রভুর ভক্ত একতান । মহাপ্রভুর সেবা-বিনা নাহি জানে আন ॥ ২৫৭ ॥
sārvabhauma hailā prabhura bhakta ekatāna mahāprabhura sevā-vinā nāhi jāne āna
English translation
Translation
Indeed, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya became an unalloyed devotee of Caitanya Mahāprabhu; he did not know anything but the service of the Lord.
Word meanings
sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; hailā — became ; prabhura — of the Lord ; bhakta — a devotee ; ekatāna — without deviation ; mahāprabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sevā — service ; vinā — except ; nāhi — not ; jāne — knows ; āna — anything else .
Madhya-lila 6.258
Source‘শ্রীকৃষ্ণচৈতন্য শচীসূত গুণধাম’ । এই ধ্যান, এই জপ, লয় এই নাম ॥ ২৫৮ ॥
‘śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya śacī-sūta guṇa-dhāma’ ei dhyāna, ei japa, laya ei nāma
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya always chanted the holy name of Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya, son of mother Śacī and reservoir of all good qualities. Indeed, chanting the holy names became his meditation.
Word meanings
śrī - kṛṣṇa - caitanya — Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śacī - sūta — the son of mother Śacī ; guṇa - dhāma — the reservoir of all good qualities ; ei — this ; dhyāna — meditation ; ei — this ; japa — chanting ; laya — he takes ; ei — this ; nāma — holy name .
Madhya-lila 6.259
Sourceএকদিন সার্বভৌম প্রভু-আগে আইলা । নমস্কার করি’ শ্লোক পড়িতে লাগিলা ॥ ২৫৯ ॥
eka-dina sārvabhauma prabhu-āge āilā namaskāra kari’ śloka paḍite lāgilā
English translation
Translation
One day Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya came before Caitanya Mahāprabhu and, after offering obeisances, began to recite a verse.
Word meanings
eka - dina — one day ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; prabhu - āge — in front of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āilā — came ; namaskāra kari’ — after offering obeisances ; śloka — a verse ; paḍite lāgilā — began to recite .
Madhya-lila 6.260
Sourceভাগবতের ‘ব্রহ্মস্তবে’র শ্লোক পড়িলা । শ্লোক-শেষে দুই অক্ষর-পাঠ ফিরাইলা ॥ ২৬০ ॥
bhāgavatera ‘brahma-stave’ra śloka paḍilā śloka-śeṣe dui akṣara-pāṭha phirāilā
English translation
Translation
He began to quote one of Lord Brahmā’s prayers from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, but he changed two syllables at the end of the verse.
Word meanings
bhāgavatera — from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam ; brahma - stavera — of the prayers of Lord Brahmā ; śloka — a verse ; paḍilā — recited ; śloka - śeṣe — at the end of the verse ; dui akṣara — of two syllables ; pāṭha — the reading ; phirāilā — changed .
Madhya-lila 6.261
Sourceতত্তেঽনুকম্পাং সুসমীক্ষমাণো ভুঞ্জান এবাত্মকৃতং বিপাকম্ । হৃদ্বাগ্বপুর্ভির্বিদধন্নমস্তে জীবেত যো ভক্তিপদে স দায়ভাক্ ॥ ২৬১ ॥
tat te ’nukampāṁ su-samīkṣamāṇo bhuñjāna evātma-kṛtaṁ vipākam hṛd-vāg-vapurbhir vidadhan namas te jīveta yo bhakti-pade sa dāya-bhāk
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya recited, “ ‘One who seeks Your compassion and thus tolerates all kinds of adverse conditions due to the karma of his past deeds, who engages always in Your devotional service with his mind, words and body, and who always offers obeisances unto You is certainly a bona fide candidate for becoming Your unalloyed devotee.’ ”
Word meanings
tat — therefore ; te — Your ; anukampām — compassion ; su - samīkṣamāṇaḥ — hoping for ; bhuñjānaḥ — enduring ; eva — certainly ; ātma - kṛtam — done by himself ; vipākam — fruitive results ; hṛt — with the heart ; vāk — words ; vapurbhiḥ — and body ; vidadhan — offering ; namaḥ — obeisances ; te — unto You ; jīveta — may live ; yaḥ — anyone who ; bhakti - pade — in devotional service ; saḥ — he ; dāya - bhāk — a bona fide candidate .
Purport
When reciting this verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.14.8) , Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya changed the original reading from mukti-pade to bhakti-pade. Mukti means liberation and merging into the impersonal Brahman effulgence. Bhakti means rendering transcendental service unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Because of having developed pure devotional service, the Bhaṭṭācārya did not like the word mukti-pade, which refers to the impersonal Brahman feature of the Lord. However, he was not authorized to change a word in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, as Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu will explain. Although the Bhaṭṭācārya changed the word in his devotional ecstasy, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu did not approve of it.
Madhya-lila 6.262
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, ‘মুক্তিপদে’ — ইহা পাঠ হয় । ‘ভক্তিপদে’ কেনে পড়, কি তোমার আশয় ॥ ২৬২ ॥
prabhu kahe, ‘mukti-pade’ — ihā pāṭha haya ‘bhakti-pade’ kene paḍa, ki tomāra āśaya
English translation
Translation
Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu immediately pointed out, “In that verse the word is ‘mukti-pade,’ but you have changed it to ‘bhakti-pade.’ What is your intention?”
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord said ; mukti - pade — the word mukti-pade ; ihā — this ; pāṭha — the reading ; haya — is ; bhakti - pade — the word bhakti-pade ; kene — why ; paḍa — you read ; ki — what ; tomāra — your ; āśaya — intention .
Madhya-lila 6.263
Sourceভট্টাচার্য কহে — ‘ভক্তি’-সম নহে মুক্তি-ফল । ভগবদ্ভক্তিবিমুখের হয় দণ্ড কেবল ॥ ২৬৩ ॥
bhaṭṭācārya kahe, — ‘bhakti’-sama nahe mukti-phala bhagavad-bhakti-vimukhera haya daṇḍa kevala
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied, “The awakening of pure love of Godhead, which is the result of devotional service, far surpasses liberation from material bondage. For those averse to devotional service, merging into the Brahman effulgence is a kind of punishment.”
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kahe — said ; bhakti — devotional service ; sama — equal to ; nahe — not ; mukti — of liberation ; phala — the result ; bhagavat - bhakti — to the devotional service of the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; vimukhera — of one who is averse to ; haya — it is ; daṇḍa — the punishment ; kevala — only .
Purport
In the Brahmāṇḍa Purāṇa it is said:
siddha-lokas tu tamasaḥ pāre yatra vasanti hi siddhā brahma-sukhe magnā daityāś ca hariṇā hatāḥ
“In Siddhaloka [Brahmaloka] there live two kinds of living entities — those who are killed by the Supreme Personality of Godhead due to their having been demons in their previous lives and those who are very fond of enjoying the impersonal effulgence of the Lord.” The word tamasaḥ means “the coverings of the universe.” Layers of material elements cover the universe, and outside these coverings is the impersonal Brahman effulgence. If one is destined to remain in the Lord’s impersonal effulgence, he misses the opportunity to render service to the Personality of Godhead. Therefore devotees consider remaining in the impersonal Brahman effulgence a kind of punishment. Sometimes devotees think of merging into the Brahman effulgence, and consequently they are promoted to Siddhaloka. Because of their impersonal understanding, they are actually punished. Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya continues to explain the distinction between mukti-pada and bhakti-pada in the following verses.
Madhya-lila 6.264-265
Sourceকৃষ্ণের বিগ্রহ যেই সত্য নাহি মানে । যেই নিন্দা-যুদ্ধাদিক করে তাঁর সনে ॥ ২৬৪ ॥ সেই দুইর দণ্ড হয় — ‘ব্রহ্মসাযুজ্য-মুক্তি’ । তার মুক্তি ফল নহে, যেই করে ভক্তি ॥ ২৬৫ ॥
kṛṣṇera vigraha yei satya nāhi māne yei nindā-yuddhādika kare tāṅra sane sei duira daṇḍa haya — ‘brahma-sāyujya-mukti’ tāra mukti phala nahe, yei kare bhakti
English translation
Translation
The Bhaṭṭācārya continued, “The impersonalists, who do not accept the transcendental form of Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, and the demons, who are always engaged in blaspheming and fighting with Him, are punished by being merged into the Brahman effulgence. But that does not happen to the person engaged in the devotional service of the Lord.
Word meanings
kṛṣṇera — of Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; vigraha — the transcendental form ; yei — anyone who ; satya — as truth ; nāhi — not ; māne — accepts ; yei — anyone who ; nindā — blaspheming ; yuddha - ādika — fighting and so forth ; kare — does ; tāṅra sane — with Him, Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; sei — these ; duira — of the two ; daṇḍa haya — there is punishment ; brahma - sāyujya - mukti — merging into the Brahman effulgence ; tāra — of him ; mukti — such liberation ; phala — the result ; nahe — not ; yei — who ; kare — executes ; bhakti — devotional service .
Madhya-lila 6.266
Sourceযদ্যপি সে মুক্তি হয় পঞ্চ-পরকার । সালোক্য-সামীপ্য-সারূপ্য-সার্ষ্টি-সাযুজ্য আর ॥ ২৬৬ ॥
yadyapi se mukti haya pañca-parakāra sālokya-sāmīpya-sārūpya-sārṣṭi-sāyujya āra
English translation
Translation
“There are five kinds of liberation: sālokya, sāmīpya, sārūpya, sārṣṭi and sāyujya.
Word meanings
yadyapi — although ; se — that ; mukti — liberation ; haya — is ; pañca - parakāra — of five different varieties ; sālokya — of the name sālokya ; sāmīpya — of the name sāmīpya ; sārūpya — of the name sārūpya ; sārṣṭi — of the name sārṣṭi ; sāyujya — of the name sāyujya ; āra — and .
Purport
Sālokya means that after material liberation one is promoted to the planet where the Supreme Personality of Godhead resides, sāmīpya means remaining an associate of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, sārūpya means attaining a four-handed form exactly like that of the Lord., sārṣṭi means attaining opulences like those of the Supreme Lord, and sāyujya means merging into the Brahman effulgence of the Lord. These are the five types of liberation.
Madhya-lila 6.267
Source‘সালোক্যাদি’ চারি যদি হয় সেবা-দ্বার । তবু কদাচিৎ ভক্ত করে অঙ্গীকার ॥ ২৬৭ ॥
‘sālokyādi’ cāri yadi haya sevā-dvāra tabu kadācit bhakta kare aṅgīkāra
English translation
Translation
“If there is a chance to serve the Supreme Personality of Godhead, a pure devotee sometimes accepts the sālokya, sārūpya, sāmīpya or sārṣṭi forms of liberation, but never sāyujya.
Word meanings
sālokya - ādi — beginning with sālokya ; cāri — four kinds of liberation ; yadi — if ; haya — are ; sevā - dvāra — a means of rendering service to the Lord ; tabu — still ; kadācit — occasionally ; bhakta — a pure devotee ; kare — makes ; aṅgīkāra — acceptance .
Madhya-lila 6.268
Source‘সাযুজ্য’ শুনিতে ভক্তের হয় ঘৃণা ভয় । নরক বাঞ্ছয়ে, তবু সাযুজ্য না লয় ॥ ২৬৮ ॥
‘sāyujya’ śunite bhaktera haya ghṛṇā-bhaya naraka vāñchaye, tabu sāyujya nā laya
English translation
Translation
“A pure devotee does not like even to hear about sāyujya-mukti, which inspires him with fear and hatred. Indeed, the pure devotee would rather go to hell than merge into the effulgence of the Lord.”
Word meanings
sāyujya — liberation by merging into the effulgence ; śunite — even to hear ; bhaktera — of the devotee ; haya — there is ; ghṛṇā — hatred ; bhaya — fear ; naraka — a hellish condition of life ; vāñchaye — he desires ; tabu — still ; sāyujya — merging into the effulgence of the Lord ; nā laya — never accepts .
Purport
Śrīla Prabodhānanda Sarasvatī has sung, kaivalyaṁ narakāyate. The impersonalist’s conception of becoming one with the effulgence of the Lord is exactly like hell. Therefore, of the five types of liberation, the first four ( sālokya, sāmīpya, sārūpya and sārṣṭi ) are not so undesirable because they can be avenues of service to the Lord. Nonetheless, a pure devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa rejects even these types of liberation; he aspires only to serve Kṛṣṇa birth after birth. He is not very interested in stopping the repetition of birth, for he simply desires to serve the Lord, even in hellish circumstances. Consequently the pure devotee hates and fears sāyujya-mukti, merging into the effulgence of the Lord. This merging is due to an offense committed against the transcendental loving service of the Lord, and therefore it is not at all desirable for a pure devotee.
Madhya-lila 6.269
Sourceব্ৰহ্মে, ঈশ্বরে সাযুজ্য দুই ত’ প্রকার । ব্রহ্ম-সাযুজ্য হৈতে ঈশ্বর-সাযুজ্য ধিক্কার ॥ ২৬৯ ॥
brahme, īśvare sāyujya dui ta’ prakāra brahma-sāyujya haite īśvara-sāyujya dhikkāra
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya continued, “There are two kinds of sāyujya-mukti: merging into the Brahman effulgence and merging into the personal body of the Lord. Merging into the Lord’s body is even more abominable than merging into His effulgence.”
Word meanings
brahme — in the Brahman effulgence ; īśvare — in the body of the Lord ; sāyujya — merging ; dui — two ; ta’ — indeed ; prakāra — varieties ; brahma - sāyujya — merging into the Brahman effulgence ; haite — than ; īśvara - sāyujya — merging into the body of the Lord ; dhikkāra — more abominable .
Purport
According to the opinion of the Māyāvādī Vedāntists, the living entity’s ultimate success is to merge into the impersonal Brahman. The impersonal Brahman, or bodily effulgence of the Supreme Lord, is known as Brahmaloka or Siddhaloka. According to the Brahma-saṁhitā (5.40) , yasya prabhā prabhavato jagad-aṇḍa-koṭi: the material universes are generated from the bodily rays of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Yogīs who follow the principles of Patañjali accept the personality of the Absolute Truth, but they want to merge into the transcendental body of the Supreme Lord. That is their desire. Being the greatest authority, the Supreme Lord can easily allow many millions of living entities to merge into His body. The origin of everything is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Bhagavān, and His bodily effulgence is known as the brahmajyoti, Brahmaloka or Siddhaloka. Thus Brahmaloka or Siddhaloka is a place where many sparklike living entities, parts and parcels of the Supreme Lord, are assembled. Because these living entities do not wish to keep their individual existences, they are combined and allowed to remain in Brahmaloka like so many atomic particles of sunshine emanating from the sun.
The word siddha is very significant. Siddha refers to one who has realized the Brahman effulgence and who has complete knowledge that the living entity is not a material atom but a spiritual spark. This understanding is described in the Bhagavad-gītā as brahma-bhūta. In the conditioned state, the living entity is known as jīva-bhūta, or “the living force within matter.” Brahma-bhūta living entities are allowed to stay in Brahmaloka or Siddhaloka, but unfortunately they sometimes again fall into the material world because they are not engaged in devotional service. This is supported by the verse in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam beginning ye ’nye ’ravindākṣa. ( Bhāg. 10.2.32 ) These semiliberated souls falsely claim to be liberated, but unless one engages in devotional service to the Lord, he is still materially contaminated. Therefore these living entities have been described as vimukta-māninaḥ, meaning that they falsely consider themselves liberated although their intelligence is not yet purified. Although these living entities undergo severe austerities to rise to the platform of Siddhaloka, they cannot remain there perpetually, for they are bereft of ānanda (bliss). Even though these living entities attain the brahma-bhūta stage and realize the Supreme Personality of Godhead through His bodily effulgence, they nonetheless fall down due to neglecting the Lord’s service. They do not properly utilize whatever little knowledge they have of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Not attaining ānanda, or bliss, they come down to the material world to enjoy. This is certainly a falldown for one who is actually liberated. The bhaktas consider such a falldown equal to achieving a place in hell.
The followers of the Patañjali yoga system actually want to merge into the body of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This indicates that they do not want to engage in His service despite their knowledge of Him, and thus their position is even more abominable than that of those who want to merge into the Lord’s effulgence. These yogīs meditate on the four-handed Viṣṇu form of the Lord in order to merge into His body. The Patañjali system describes the form of the Lord as kleśa-karma-vipākāśayair aparāmṛṣṭaḥ puruṣa-viśeṣa īśvaraḥ: “The Supreme Personality of Godhead is a person who does not partake of a miserable material life.” The yogīs accept the eternity of the Supreme Person in one of their mantras — sa pūrveṣām api guruḥ kālānavacchedāt: “Such a person is always supreme and is not influenced by the element of time.” The followers of the Patañjali system therefore accept the eternity of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, yet, according to them, puruṣārtha-śūnyānāṁ pratiprasavaḥ kaivalyaṁ svarūpa-pratiṣṭhā vā citi-śaktir iti. They believe that in the perfectional stage, the conception of puruṣa is vanquished. According to their description, citi-śaktir iti. They believe that when one becomes perfect, he cannot remain a person. This yoga system is therefore abominable because its final conception is impersonal. In the beginning, these yogīs accept the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but they ultimately give up this idea in order to become impersonal. They are most unfortunate because although they have a personal conception of the Absolute Truth, they neglect to render devotional service to the Lord and thus fall down again into the material world. As mentioned above, this idea is supported by Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam 10.2.32 : aruhya kṛcchreṇa paraṁ padaṁ tataḥ patanty adho ’nādṛta-yuṣmad-aṅghrayaḥ. Due to neglecting the lotus feet of the Lord, these yogīs again fall down into the material existence ( patanty adhaḥ ) . Consequently this path of yoga is more abominable than the impersonalists’ path. This conclusion is also supported by Lord Kapiladeva in the following verse from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (3.29.13) .
Madhya-lila 6.270
Sourceসালোক্য-সার্ষ্টি-সামীপ্য সারূপ্যৈকত্বমপ্যুত । দীয়মানং ন গৃহ্ণন্তি বিনা মৎ-সেবনং জনাঃ ॥ ২৭০ ॥
sālokya-sārṣṭi-sāmīpya- sārūpyaikatvam apy uta dīyamānaṁ na gṛhṇanti vinā mat-sevanaṁ janāḥ
English translation
Translation
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya concluded, “ ‘Even though he is offered all kinds of liberation, the pure devotee does not accept them. He is fully satisfied engaging in the service of the Lord.’ ”
Word meanings
sālokya — the liberation of living in the same planet as the Lord ; sārṣṭi — to have opulence exactly like that of the Lord ; sāmīpya — to associate always with the Lord ; sārūpya — to achieve a body like that of the Lord ; ekatvam — to merge into the body of the Lord ; api — although ; uta — it is said ; dīyamānam — being offered ; na — not ; gṛhṇanti — do accept ; vinā — without ; mat — My ; sevanam — service ; janāḥ — the pure devotees .
Madhya-lila 6.271
Sourceপ্রভু কহে, — ‘মুক্তিপদে’র আর অর্থ হয় । মুক্তিপদ-শব্দে ‘সাক্ষাৎ ঈশ্বর’ কহয় ॥ ২৭১ ॥
prabhu kahe, — ‘mukti-pade’ra āra artha haya mukti-pada-śabde ‘sākṣāt īśvara’ kahaya
English translation
Translation
Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu replied, “The word ‘mukti-pade’ has another meaning. ‘Mukti-pada’ directly refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Word meanings
prabhu kahe — the Lord said ; mukti - padera — of the term mukti-pade ; āra — another ; artha — meaning ; haya — there is ; mukti - pada - śabde — by the word mukti-pada ; sākṣāt — directly ; īśvara — the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; kahaya — is said .
Madhya-lila 6.272
Sourceমুক্তি পদে যাঁর, সেই ‘মুক্তিপদ’ হয় । কিম্বা নবম পদার্থ ‘মুক্তির’ সমাশ্রয় ॥ ২৭২ ॥
mukti pade yāṅra, sei ‘mukti-pada’ haya kimvā navama padārtha ‘muktira’ samāśraya
English translation
Translation
“All kinds of liberation exist under the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; therefore He is known as mukti-pada. According to another meaning, mukti is the ninth subject, and the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the shelter of liberation.
Word meanings
mukti — liberation ; pade — at the lotus feet ; yāṅra — of whom ; sei — such a person ; mukti - pada haya — is known as mukti-pada ; kimvā — or ; navama — ninth ; pada - artha — subject matter ; muktira — of liberation ; samāśraya — shelter .
Purport
Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa is also known as Mukunda, or He who gives transcendental bliss by offering all kinds of mukti. Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is divided into twelve cantos, and in the Ninth Canto different kinds of mukti are described. But the Tenth Canto is the actual center of all discussions of mukti because the Personality of Godhead Śrī Kṛṣṇa, who is the tenth subject discussed in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, is the exclusive subject of the Tenth Canto. Since all types of muktis reside at the lotus feet of Śrī Kṛṣṇa, He may be called mukti-pada.
Madhya-lila 6.273
Sourceদুই-অর্থে ‘কৃষ্ণ’ কহি, কেনে পাঠ ফিরি । সার্বভৌম কহে, — ও-পাঠ কহিতে না পারি ॥ ২৭৩ ॥
dui-arthe ‘kṛṣṇa’ kahi, kene pāṭha phiri sārvabhauma kahe, — o-pāṭha kahite nā pāri
English translation
Translation
“Since I can understand Kṛṣṇa according to these two meanings,” Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “what point is there in changing the verse?” Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied, “I was not able to give that reading to the verse.
Word meanings
dui - arthe — by two interpretations ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa ; kahi — I accept ; kene — why ; pāṭha — reading ; phiri — changing ; sārvabhauma kahe — Sārvabhauma replied ; o - pāṭha — such a reading ; kahite — to say ; nā — not ; pāri — am able .
Purport
Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya replied, “I was not able to give that reading to the verse.
Madhya-lila 6.274
Sourceযদ্যপি তোমার অর্থ এই শব্দে কয় । তথাপি ‘আশ্লিষ্য-দোষে’ কহন না যায় ॥ ২৭৪ ॥
yadyapi tomāra artha ei śabde kaya tathāpi ‘āśliṣya-doṣe’ kahana nā yāya
English translation
Translation
“Although Your explanation is correct, it should not be used, because there is ambiguity in the word ‘mukti-pada.’
Word meanings
yadyapi — although ; tomāra — Your ; artha — meaning ; ei — this ; śabde — by the word ; kaya — is said ; tathāpi — still ; āśliṣya - doṣe — by the fault of ambiguity ; kahana — to say ; nā — not ; yāya — possible .
Madhya-lila 6.275
Sourceযদ্যপি ‘মুক্তি’-শব্দের হয় পঞ্চ বৃত্তি । রূঢ়িবৃত্ত্যে কহে তবু ‘সাযুজ্যে’ প্রতীতি ॥ ২৭৫ ॥
yadyapi ‘mukti’-śabdera haya pañca vṛtti rūḍhi-vṛttye kahe tabu ‘sāyujye’ pratīti
English translation
Translation
“The word ‘mukti’ refers to five kinds of liberation. But its direct meaning usually conveys the idea of becoming one with the Lord.
Word meanings
yadyapi — although ; mukti - śabdera — of the word mukti ; haya — there are ; pañca vṛtti — five meanings ; rūḍhi - vṛttye — by the chief or direct meaning ; kahe — it says ; tabu — still ; sāyujye — to become one with the Supreme ; pratīti — the conception .
Madhya-lila 6.276
Sourceমুক্তি-শব্দ কহিতে মনে হয় ঘৃণা-ত্রাস । ভক্তি-শব্দ কহিতে মনে হয় ত’ উল্লাস ॥ ২৭৬ ॥
mukti-śabda kahite mane haya ghṛṇā-trāsa bhakti-śabda kahite mane haya ta’ ullāsa
English translation
Translation
“The very sound of the word ‘mukti’ immediately induces hate and fear, but when we say the word ‘bhakti,’ we naturally feel transcendental bliss within the mind.”
Word meanings
mukti - śabda — the word mukti ; kahite — by pronouncing ; mane — in the mind ; haya — there is ; ghṛṇā — hatred ; trāsa — and fear ; bhakti - śabda — the word bhakti ; kahite — to speak ; mane — in the mind ; haya — there is ; ta’ — indeed ; ullāsa — transcendental joy .
Madhya-lila 6.277
Sourceশুনিয়া হাসেন প্রভু আনন্দিত-মনে । ভট্টাচার্যে কৈল প্রভু দৃঢ় আলিঙ্গনে ॥ ২৭৭ ॥
śuniyā hāsena prabhu ānandita-mane bhaṭṭācārya kaila prabhu dṛḍha āliṅgane
English translation
Translation
Upon hearing this explanation, the Lord began to laugh and, with great pleasure, immediately embraced Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya very firmly.
Word meanings
śuniyā — hearing this explanation ; hāsena — laughs ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ānandita - mane — with great pleasure in His mind ; bhaṭṭācārya — unto Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kaila — did ; prabhu — the Lord ; dṛḍha — firm ; āliṅgane — embracing .
Madhya-lila 6.278
Sourceযেই ভট্টাচার্য পড়ে পড়ায় মায়াবাদে । তাঁর ঐছে বাক্য স্ফুরে চৈতন্য-প্রসাদে ॥ ২৭৮ ॥
yei bhaṭṭācārya pade paḍāya māyāvāde tāṅra aiche vākya sphure caitanya-prasāde
English translation
Translation
Indeed, that very person who had been accustomed to reading and teaching Māyāvāda philosophy was now even hating the word “mukti.” This was possible only by the mercy of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.
Word meanings
yei — that ; bhaṭṭācārya — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; paḍe — reads ; paḍāya — teaches ; māyāvāde — the philosophy of Māyāvāda impersonalism ; tāṅra — his ; aiche — such ; vākya — explanation ; sphure — manifested ; caitanya - prasāde — by the mercy of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .
Madhya-lila 6.279
Sourceলোহাকে যাবৎ স্পর্শি’ হেম নাহি করে । তাবৎ স্পর্শমণি কেহ চিনিতে না পারে ॥ ২৭৯ ॥
lohāke yāvat sparśi’ hema nāhi kare tāvat sparśa-maṇi keha cinite nā pāre
English translation
Translation
As long as it does not turn iron into gold by its touch, no one can recognize an unknown stone to be a touchstone.
Word meanings
lohāke — iron ; yāvat — as long as ; sparśi’ — touching ; hema — gold ; nāhi — not ; kare — transforms ; tāvat — until then ; sparśa - maṇi — the touchstone ; keha — someone ; cinite — to recognize ; nā — not ; pāre — is able .
Madhya-lila 6.280
Sourceভট্টাচার্যের বৈষ্ণবতা দেখি’ সর্বজন । প্রভুকে জানিল — ‘সাক্ষাৎ ব্রজেন্দ্রনন্দন’ ॥ ২৮০ ॥
bhaṭṭācāryera vaiṣṇavatā dekhi’ sarva-jana prabhuke jānila — ‘sākṣāt vrajendra-nandana’
English translation
Translation
Upon seeing transcendental Vaiṣṇavism in Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, everyone could understand that Lord Caitanya was none other than Kṛṣṇa, the son of Nanda Mahārāja.
Word meanings
bhaṭṭācāryera — of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; vaiṣṇavatā — clear understanding of Vaiṣṇava philosophy ; dekhi’ — seeing ; sarva - jana — all persons ; prabhuke — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; jānila — knew ; sākṣāt — directly ; vrajendra - nandana — Kṛṣṇa, the son of Mahārāja Nanda .
Madhya-lila 6.281
Sourceকাশীমিশ্র-আদি যত নীলাচলবাসী । শরণ লইল সবে প্ৰভু-পদে আসি’ ॥ ২৮১ ॥
kāśī-miśra-ādi yata nīlācala-vāsī śaraṇa la-ila sabe prabhu-pade āsi’
English translation
Translation
After this incident, all the inhabitants of Jagannātha Purī, headed by Kāśī Miśra, came to take shelter of the lotus feet of the Lord.
Word meanings
kāśī - miśra — Kāśī Miśra ; ādi — heading the list ; yata — all ; nīlācala - vāsī — the residents of Jagannātha Purī ; śaraṇa — shelter ; la - ila — took ; sabe — all ; prabhu - pade — to the lotus feet of the Lord ; āsi’ — coming .
Madhya-lila 6.282
Sourceসেই সব কথা আগে করিব বর্ণন । সার্বভৌম করে যৈছে প্রভুর সেবন ॥ ২৮২ ॥
sei saba kathā āge kariba varṇana sārvabhauma kare yaiche prabhura sevana
English translation
Translation
Later I shall describe how Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya always engaged in the service of the Lord.
Word meanings
sei saba — all these ; kathā — narrations ; āge — later ; kariba — I shall make ; varṇana — description ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; kare — does ; yaiche — as ; prabhura — of the Lord ; sevana — service .
Madhya-lila 6.283
Sourceযৈছে পরিপাটী করে ভিক্ষা-নিৰ্বাহন । বিস্তারিয়া আগে তাহা করিব বর্ণন ॥ ২৮৩ ॥
yaiche paripāṭī kare bhikṣā-nirvāhana vistāriyā āge tāhā kariba varṇana
English translation
Translation
I shall also describe in full detail how Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya perfectly rendered service to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu by offering Him alms.
Word meanings
yaiche — how ; paripāṭī — perfectly ; kare — does ; bhikṣā — of offering alms ; nirvāhana — the execution ; vistāriyā — in full detail ; āge — later ; tāhā — that ; kariba varṇana — I shall describe .
Madhya-lila 6.284-285
Sourceএই মহাপ্ৰভুর লীলা — সার্বভৌম-মিলন । ইহা যেই শ্রদ্ধা করি’ করয়ে শ্রবণ ॥ ২৮৪ ॥ জ্ঞান-কর্মপাশ হৈতে হয় বিমোচন । অচিরে মিলয়ে তাঁরে চৈতন্যচরণ ॥ ২৮৫ ॥
ei mahāprabhura līlā — sārvabhauma-milana ihā yei śraddhā kari’ karaye śravaṇa jñāna-karma-pāśa haite haya vimocana acire milaye tāṅre caitanya-caraṇa
English translation
Translation
If one hears with faith and love these pastimes concerning Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s meeting with Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, he very soon is freed from the net of speculation and fruitive activity and attains the shelter of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s lotus feet.
Word meanings
ei — this ; mahāprabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; līlā — pastime ; sārvabhauma - milana — meeting with Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; ihā — this ; yei — anyone who ; śraddhā — faith ; kari’ — having ; karaye — does ; śravaṇa — hearing ; jñāna - karma — of speculation and fruitive activities ; pāśa — the net ; haite — from ; haya — there is ; vimocana — liberation ; acire — very soon ; milaye — meets ; tāṅre — such a devotee ; caitanya - caraṇa — the lotus feet of Lord Caitanya .
Madhya-lila 6.286
Sourceশ্রীরূপ-রঘুনাথ-পদে যার আশ । চৈতন্যচরিতামৃত কহে কৃষ্ণদাস ॥ ২৮৬ ॥
śrī-rūpa-raghunātha-pade yāra āśa caitanya-caritāmṛta kahe kṛṣṇadāsa
English translation
Translation
Praying at the lotus feet of Śrī Rūpa and Śrī Raghunātha, always desiring their mercy, I, Kṛṣṇadāsa, narrate Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta, following in their footsteps.
Word meanings
śrī - rūpa — Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī ; raghunātha — Śrīla Raghunātha dāsa Gosvāmī ; pade — at the lotus feet ; yāra — whose ; āśa — expectation ; caitanya - caritāmṛta — the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛta ; kahe — describes ; kṛṣṇadāsa — Śrīla Kṛṣṇadāsa Kavirāja Gosvāmī .
Purport
Thus end the Bhaktivedanta purports to Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta, Madhya-līlā, sixth chapter, describing the liberation of Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya.